summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/texmf-dist/source
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'texmf-dist/source')
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/lmacs/lmacs.dtx138
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.pdfbin0 -> 33971 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.tex108
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex_pdftex.tex111
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.dtx261
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.ins59
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.dtx1988
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.ins64
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.dtx214
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.ins59
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/test_ren.tex27
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/doc/richtextman.tex1106
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.dtx775
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.ins60
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.pdfbin0 -> 347953 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.tex737
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/config_intacc.def29
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIA9.epsbin0 -> 290523 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIAX.epsbin0 -> 400298 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/trustmanager.epsbin0 -> 845442 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/yt_icon_sm.epsbin0 -> 558266 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-1.tex93
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-2.tex152
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-3.tex88
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/graphics/pdfyt_poster.epsbin0 -> 850618 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/swf/pdf_tube_basic.swfbin0 -> 10470 bytes
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.dtx629
-rw-r--r--texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.ins60
28 files changed, 6758 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/lmacs/lmacs.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/lmacs/lmacs.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..23c3d08a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/lmacs/lmacs.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% http://www.texdev.net/2009/10/06/a-model-dtx-file/
+% !TEX program = pdfLaTeX
+%<*internal>
+\iffalse
+%</internal>
+%<*internal>
+\fi
+\def\nameofplainTeX{plain}
+\ifx\fmtname\nameofplainTeX\else
+ \expandafter\begingroup
+\fi
+%</internal>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+\ifx\fmtname\nameofplainTeX
+\generate{
+ \file{\jobname.sty}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{package}}
+}
+\fi
+%</install>
+%<install>\endbatchfile
+%<*internal>
+\ifx\fmtname\nameofplainTeX
+ \expandafter\endbatchfile\else
+ \expandafter\endgroup\fi
+%</internal>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{lmacs}
+%<package> [2012/05/30 v1.1 Imports local macro files]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%\usepackage{\jobname}
+%\usepackage[numbered]{hypdoc}
+%\EnableCrossrefs
+%\CodelineIndex
+%\RecordChanges
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{\jobname.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%\GetFileInfo{\jobname.sty}
+%
+%\title{The \textsf{\jobname} Package}
+%\author{D. P. Story}
+%\date{Released \today}
+%
+%\maketitle
+%
+%\StopEventually{^^A
+% \PrintChanges
+% \PrintIndex
+%}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Description.} This package is used to clean up the
+% preamble of {\LaTeX} files. Some preambles have a (large) number of definitions
+% in them. To clean up the preamble, move the definitions in the preamble into a separate file, and
+% use this package in import them into your preamble. Normally,
+% \textsf{lmacs} would have a position that follows all packages for the
+% document.
+%
+% \textsf{lmacs} stands for \underbar{l}ocal \underbar{mac}ro\underbar{s}. Normally, the files referenced are in the same folder
+% as the main source file; they should not (but can) be in the search path of {\LaTeX}.
+%
+% \paragraph*{Demo files:} \texttt{lmacs\_tst.tex} (a simple latex source)
+% and \texttt{lmacs\_aeb.tex} (a file that uses the \textsf{web} and \textsf{exerquiz} packages).
+% These are found in the \texttt{examples} folder.
+%
+% \paragraph*{Documentation and Code.}
+% We begin by requiring \texttt{kvoptions}, this package does not test for the presence
+% of a class file, so we can use it. It allows us to define key-values as options of the
+% package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{kvoptions}[2009/07/21]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{cfg}
+% \begin{macro}{def}
+% \begin{macro}{js}
+% With these keys, you can specify the file with the specified extension be imported.
+% For example, the following line
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usepackage[cfg=myconf,def=mydef,js=myjs]{lmacs}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% will import (using \cs{InputIfFileExists}) the files \texttt{myconf.cfg},
+% \texttt{mydef.def}, and \texttt{myjs.js}. Multiple specifications of the same
+% extension is permitted, for example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usepackage[def=mydef1,def=mydef2]{lmacs}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\LM@inputlist\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\LM@input} inputs \texttt{\#1.\#2}, while \cmd{\LM@warning} issues
+% a package warning if \texttt{\#1.\#2} is not found.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\LM@input}[2]{\InputIfFileExists{#1.#2}{}%
+ {\LM@warning{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\LM@warning}[2]{\PackageWarning{lmacs}
+ {The file #1.#2 cannot be found}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{!cfg}\DescribeMacro{!def}\DescribeMacro{!js}For each of these options, we add the specified file to
+% \cs{LM@inputlist}, this will be executed at the end of the package. The three options
+% \texttt{!cfg}, \texttt{!def}, \texttt{!js} do nothing, making it easy to include, or
+% not include a file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{lmacs}{cfg}{\g@addto@macro\LM@inputlist{\LM@input{#1}{cfg}}}
+\define@key{lmacs}{!cfg}{}
+\define@key{lmacs}{def}{\g@addto@macro\LM@inputlist{\LM@input{#1}{def}}}
+\define@key{lmacs}{!def}{}
+\define@key{lmacs}{js}{\g@addto@macro\LM@inputlist{\LM@input{#1}{js}}}
+\define@key{lmacs}{!js}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessKeyvalOptions{lmacs}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Once the options have been process, we execute the command
+% \cs{LM@inputlist} which contains a list of the files to be input.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\LM@inputlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\Finale
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.pdf b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c576f284
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6f0acc7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[designv]{web}
+\usepackage{eforms}
+\usepackage{popupmenu}
+
+\title{The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{popupmenu}}{popupmenu} Package Test File}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{Test file for the popupmenu Package}
+\keywords{LaTeX, popupmenu, Acrobat JavaScript, AcroTeX}
+
+\university{NORTHWEST FLORIDA STATE COLLEGE\\
+ Department of Mathematics}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\version{1.0}
+
+%\nocopyright
+\norevisionLabel
+
+%
+% This package can be used by users of pdftex, dvipdfm, dvips (with distiller)
+%
+
+\urlPath{\aebhome}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+
+\begin{popupmenu}{AeBMenu}
+ \item{title=AeB, return=\aebhome/webeq.html}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=AeB Pro Family}
+ \item{title=Home page,return=\aebhome/aeb_pro.html}
+ \item{title=Graphicxsp,return=\aebhome/graphicxsp.html}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=eqExam,return=\aebhome/eqexam.html}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+\begin{popupmenu}{AeBMenuLocal}
+ \item{title=AeB, return=\aebhome/webeq.html}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=AeB Pro Family,enabled=false}
+ \item{title=Home page,return=\aebhome/aeb_pro.html}
+ \item{title=Graphicxsp,return=\aebhome/graphicxsp.html}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=eqExam,return=\aebhome/eqexam.html}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+%
+% This menu was taken from the Acrobat JavaScript API Reference
+% as a test of the new popupmenu and submenu environments.
+%
+\begin{popupmenu}{myMenu}
+ \item{title=Item 1, marked, enabled=false}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Item 2}
+ \item{title={Item 2, Submenu 1}}
+ \begin{submenu}{title={Item 2, Submenu 2}}
+ \item{title={Item 2, Submenu 2, Subsubmenu 1}}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=Item 3}
+ \item{title=Item 4}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+\begin{insDLJS}[AeBMenu]{md}{Menu Data}
+\AeBMenu
+\myMenu
+\end{insDLJS}
+
+\parindent0pt\parskip6pt
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file uses the \textsf{eforms} package to create push buttons,
+the push button of \textsf{hyperref} can also be used.
+
+Here is an example taken from the Acrobat JavaScript API Reference:
+\pushButton[\CA{My Menu}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(myMenu);\r
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.alert("You chose the \\""+cChoice+"\\" menu item");
+}}}]{mymenu}{}{11bp}
+
+We can add a push button with a rollover effect
+\pushButton[\CA{Packages}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenu);\r
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.launchURL(cChoice);
+}}}]{menu}{}{11bp}
+
+You can also open the menu with a link:
+\setLinkText[\A{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenu);\r
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.launchURL(cChoice);
+}}]{Package}. Links do not have a rollover effect, however, you can use buttons like so: {\setbox0=\hbox{\textcolor{red}{Packages}}%
+\makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton[\W0\BG{}\BC{}\S{S}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenu);\r if ( cChoice != null )
+app.launchURL(cChoice); }}}]{menu}{\wd0}{\ht0+\dp0}}\unhbox0}.
+
+This is a version that has a local version of the menu array:
+{\setbox0=\hbox{\textcolor{red}{Packages}}%
+\makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton[\W0\BG{}\BC{}\S{S}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+\AeBMenuLocal\r
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenuLocal);\r if ( cChoice != null )
+app.launchURL(cChoice);}}}]{menu}{\wd0}{\ht0+\dp0}}\unhbox0}
+\end{document}
+
+This is a version that has a local version of the menu array:
+\PushButton[name=hyperbutton,onmouseover={\AeBMenuLocal
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenuLocal); if ( cChoice != null )
+app.launchURL(cChoice); }]{Packages}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex_pdftex.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex_pdftex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3254570d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/examples/pumen_ex_pdftex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[designv,pdftex]{web}
+\usepackage{eforms}
+\usepackage{popupmenu}
+
+\title{The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{popupmenu}}{popupmenu} Package Test File}
+\author{D. P. Story}
+\subject{Test file for the popupmenu Package}
+\keywords{LaTeX, popupmenu, Acrobat JavaScript, AcroTeX}
+
+\university{NORTHWEST FLORIDA STATE COLLEGE\\
+ Department of Mathematics}
+\email{dpstory@acrotex.net}
+\version{1.0}
+
+%\nocopyright
+\norevisionLabel
+
+%
+% This package can be used by users of pdftex, dvipdfm, dvips (with distiller)
+%
+
+\urlPath{\aebhome}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+
+\begin{popupmenu}{AeBMenu}
+ \item{title=AeB, return=\aebhome/webeq.html}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=AeB Pro Family}
+ \item{title=Home page,return=\aebhome/aeb_pro.html}
+ \item{title=Graphicxsp,return=\aebhome/graphicxsp.html}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=eqExam,return=\aebhome/eqexam.html}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+\begin{popupmenu}{AeBMenuLocal}
+ \item{title=AeB, return=\aebhome/webeq.html}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=AeB Pro Family,enabled=false}
+ \item{title=Home page,return=\aebhome/aeb_pro.html}
+ \item{title=Graphicxsp,return=\aebhome/graphicxsp.html}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=eqExam,return=\aebhome/eqexam.html}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+%
+% This menu was taken from the Acrobat JavaScript API Reference
+% as a test of the new popupmenu and submenu environments.
+%
+\begin{popupmenu}{myMenu}
+ \item{title=Item 1, marked, enabled=false}
+ \item{title=-}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Item 2}
+ \item{title={Item 2, Submenu 1}}
+ \begin{submenu}{title={Item 2, Submenu 2}}
+ \item{title={Item 2, Submenu 2, Subsubmenu 1}}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \item{title=Item 3}
+ \item{title=Item 4}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+\begin{insDLJS}[AeBMenu]{md}{Menu Data}
+\AeBMenu
+\myMenu
+\end{insDLJS}
+
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+
+\parindent0pt\parskip6pt
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file uses the \textsf{hyperref} package to create push buttons,
+the push button of \textsf{eforms} can also be used.
+
+
+Here is an example taken from the Acrobat JavaScript API Reference, it uses
+the \cs{PushButton} command of \textsf{hyperref}. The script is implemented as
+a mouse up event, rather than a rollover event as it appears \cs{PushButton} does not
+support rollover. There is a \texttt{onmouseover} key that is supposed to work, but it doesn't.
+\PushButton[name=mymenu,
+onclick={var cChoice = \popUpMenu(myMenu);
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.alert("You chose the \eqbs\eqbs""+cChoice+"\eqbs\eqbs" menu item");
+}]{My Menu}
+
+
+Here is the same example, but using \cs{pushButton}, the button command from the eforms package.
+It is implemented as a rollover event.
+\pushButton[\CA{My Menu}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(myMenu);\r
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.alert("You chose the \\""+cChoice+"\\" menu item");
+}}}]{mymenu}{}{11bp}
+
+We can add a push button with a rollover effect
+\pushButton[\CA{Packages}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenu);\r
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.launchURL(cChoice);
+}}}]{menu}{}{11bp}
+
+This is a version that has a local version of the \texttt{AeBMenuLocal} array.
+If we place the array as field-level JavaScript, we don't need the \textsf{eforms} package.
+Again, this is an \texttt{onclick} event.
+\PushButton[name=mymenu,onclick={\AeBMenuLocal;
+var cChoice = \popUpMenu(AeBMenuLocal);
+if ( cChoice != null ) app.launchURL(cChoice);}]{AeB Local Menu}
+
+Fancier examples can be found at the \textcolor{blue}{AeB Blog} (\url{www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aebblog.html}).
+\end{document}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ca46a31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+% \iffalse
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% popupmenu.sty package, 2009-10-15 %%
+%% Copyright (C) 2009 D. P. Story %%
+%% dpstory@acrotex.net %%
+%% storyd@nwfsc.edu %%
+%% %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version. %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{popupmenu}
+%<package> [2010/09/18 v1.0 Provides support for popup menus (dps)]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
+\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}%
+\EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex
+\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+\begin{document}
+ \GetFileInfo{popupmenu.sty}
+ \title{The \textsf{popupmenu} Package}
+ \author{D. P. Story\\
+ Email: \texttt{dpstory@acrotex.net}}
+ \date{processed \today}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \let\Email\texttt
+ \DocInput{popupmenu.dtx}
+ \PrintIndex
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is a short package that provides environments and commands for building
+% a popup menu using JavaScript. The command \cs{popUpMenu} uses the Acrobat JavaScript
+% method \texttt{app.popUpMenuEx}. This latter method requires you to pass to it a
+% structured menu listing of the menu items to be displayed in the popup menu, and the actions
+% to be taken when a menu item is selected. The environments \texttt{popupmenu} and
+% \texttt{submenu} are defined for the purpose of creating this hierarchical structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% According to the JavaScript manual, the \texttt{app.popUpMenuEx} method takes
+% one or more \texttt{MenuItem} objects. The {\LaTeX} access to the properties of this object are documented
+% as follows (taken verbatim from the JavaScript reference):
+% \begin{macro}{title}
+% The menu item name, which is the string to appear on the menu item. The value of
+% \texttt{"-"} is reserved to draw a separator line in the menu.
+% \begin{macro}{marked}
+% (optional) A Boolean value specifying whether the item is to be marked with a
+% check. The default is \texttt{false} (not marked).
+% \begin{macro}{enabled}
+% (optional) A Boolean value specifying whether the item is to appear enabled or
+% grayed out. The default is \texttt{true} (enabled).
+% \begin{macro}{return}
+% (optional) A string to be returned when the menu item is selected. The default is the
+% value of cName.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{menustruct}{title}[]{\def\menustruct@title{#1}}
+\define@boolkey{menustruct}{marked}[true]{}
+\define@boolkey{menustruct}{enabled}[true]{}
+\define@key{menustruct}{return}[]{\def\menustruct@return{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% We use the command \cs{pum@holdtoks} to hold the menu items as they are processed
+% in the environment, and use \cs{@AddToMenuToks} to add to the items.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\pum@holdtoks\@empty
+\newcommand{\@AddToMenuToks}{\g@addto@macro\pum@holdtoks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{environment}{popupmenu}
+% We begin by defining our menu structure using the
+% \texttt{popupmenu} environment. Within this environment,
+% we list the items in the menu using \cs{item} and
+% the \texttt{submenu} menu if there are sub menus.
+%
+% The \texttt{popupmenu} command requires one parameter, this command is
+% used to create both a command and a JavaScript variable. The name is
+% passed to the \cs{popUpMenu} command, while the command version of the
+% name expands to the menu structure. The menu structure can be placed
+% at the document level, or as part of a push button action.
+% Here is an example of usage:\par
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\urlPath{\aebhome}{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+%\begin{popupmenu}{myMenu}
+% \item{title=AeB,return=\aebhome/webeq.html}
+% \item{title=-}
+% \begin{submenu}{title=AeB Pro Family}
+% \item{title=Home page, return=\aebhome/aeb_pro.html}
+% \item{title=Graphicxsp, return=\aebhome/graphicxsp.html}
+% \end{submenu}
+% \item{title=eqExam, return=\aebhome/eqexam.html}
+%\end{popupmenu}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%The above definition can be conveniently placed in the preamble, though it can
+% appear anywhere before it is used, obviously. Now to use the menu structure,
+% all we need is a push button or link to create a JavaScript action:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \pushButton[\CA{Packages}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{%
+% \myMenu\r
+% var cChoice = \popUpMenu(myMenu);\r
+% if ( cChoice != null ) app.launchURL(cChoice);
+% }}}]{menu}{}{11bp}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The above example uses the \textsf{eforms} package, but a push button from \textsf{hyperref} will do too.
+% The \texttt{app.popUpMenuEx} method returns the return value, which we, in turn, process. In this
+% case, the return is a URL, which we launch.
+%
+% If we have placed \cs{myMenu} at the document level, the line \verb!\myMenu\r! would not be needed.
+% If you are using the same menu several times in the document, put it at the document level to reduce
+% file size.
+%
+% Also, in the above example, you see how the name, \texttt{myMenu}, passed as an argument
+% of the popupmenu environment is used as a name and as a command: The name is passed to
+% \cs{popUpMenu}, while the command expands to the menu structure that is referenced by the name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindex}
+% We generate the index of each menu item. \cs{itemindex} is
+% the index of the menu structure array; for example,
+% \cs{itemindex} might expand to \texttt{[0]}, \texttt{[1].oSubMenu[3]}, or \texttt{[2].oSubMenu[3].oSubMenu[0]}.
+% If \cs{itemindex} is included in the return value (possibly as an array entry), we can
+% know the item the use selected
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%var aChoice=processMenu(AeBMenu);
+%if (aChoice!=null) {
+% var thisChoice=aChoice[0]; // this is a string
+% var thistitle=eval("AeBMenu"+thisChoice+".cName");
+% app.alert(thistitle);
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The above code gets the return array, then uses it to get the title of the item
+% selected,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\pum@cnt
+\def\pum@updateindex{\global\advance\pum@cnt\@ne
+ \edef\pum@rc{\pum@topindex[\the\pum@cnt]}\edef\itemindex{'\pum@rc'}}
+\def\pum@initIndexMenu#1{\global\pum@cnt=-1\relax\edef\pum@rc{#1}%
+ \edef\pum@topindex{\pum@rc}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% We are now ready to define the \texttt{popupmenu} environment. The environment
+% takes one required parameter, a name that is used as a JavaScript variable.
+% This name is also used to create a command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{popupmenu}[1]{\pum@initIndexMenu{}%
+ \let\pum@holdtoks\@empty
+ \toks@={\pum@mytab}\@makeother\~
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We initialize with a \cs{@gobble}, which eats up the leading comma (,)
+% that is placed there by the code below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\msarg{#1}\@AddToMenuToks{\@gobble}%
+ \let\item\pum@item
+}{%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\msarg\endcsname{%
+ var \msarg\space = [ \pum@holdtoks^^J];}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \begin{macro}{\pum@item}
+% At the startup of the \texttt{popupmenu} environment, we \verb|\let\item\pum@item|.
+% The definition of \cs{pum@item} takes one argument, the properties described above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pum@item}[1]{\pum@updateindex
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand
+ \setkeys{menustruct}{title,marked=false,enabled,return,#1}}\tmp@exp
+ \edef\tmp@exp{,^^J\the\toks@
+ {cName: "\menustruct@title"%
+ \ifKV@menustruct@marked, bMarked: true\fi%
+ \ifKV@menustruct@enabled\else, bEnabled: false\fi%
+ \ifx\menustruct@return\@empty\else,
+ cReturn: "\menustruct@return"\fi}}%
+ \expandafter\@AddToMenuToks\expandafter{\tmp@exp}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Some technical matters, we need unmatched braces, so we define
+% \cs{pum@lbrace} and \cs{pum@rbrace}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`<=1 \catcode`\>=2 \@makeother\{ \@makeother\}
+\gdef\pum@lbrace<{>\gdef\pum@rbrace<}>
+\endgroup
+\def\pum@mytab{\space\space\space\space}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{environment}{submenu}
+% Used to create a submenu of a menu item. The top level menu item has no return value,
+% it can be marked but cannot be dis-enabled (\texttt{enabled=false}).
+%
+% The argument of \texttt{submenu} are any of the menu item properties, however, only
+% \texttt{title} and \texttt{marked} will be recognized.
+%
+% The JavaScript property, \texttt{oSubMenu}, of the menu structure passed to
+% the method \texttt{app.popUpMenuEx} has no {\LaTeX} counterpart. This property
+% key-value pair is automatically inserted by the \texttt{submenu}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{submenu}[1]{\pum@updateindex
+ \xdef\saved@pum@cnt{\the\pum@cnt}%
+ \pum@initIndexMenu{\pum@rc.oSubMenu}\edef\temp@toks{\the\toks@}%
+ \toks@=\expandafter{\temp@toks\pum@mytab}%
+ \setkeys{menustruct}{title,marked=false,enabled,return,#1}%
+ \edef\tmp@exp{,^^J\the\toks@
+ \noexpand\pum@lbrace cName: "\menustruct@title"%
+ \ifKV@menustruct@marked, bMarked: true\fi%
+ \ifKV@menustruct@enabled\else, bEnabled: false\fi,
+ oSubMenu:^^J\the\toks@[}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Again, we \cs{@gobble} up the leading comma (,).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@AddToMenuToks\expandafter{\tmp@exp\@gobble}%
+}{%
+ \edef\tmp@exp{^^J\the\toks@ ]\pum@rbrace}%
+ \expandafter\@AddToMenuToks\expandafter{\tmp@exp}%
+ \global\pum@cnt\saved@pum@cnt
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \begin{macro}{\popUpMenu}
+% The \cs{popUpMenu} command takes one argument, the name pass to a
+% popupmenu environment. The command expands to the \texttt{app.popUpMenuEx}
+% method. The document author must then process the return value in some way.
+% The argument is enclosed in parentheses, this is so we can use \cs{popUpMenu}
+% at the document level, we can pass it an argument there.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\popUpMenu(#1){app.popUpMenuEx.apply( app, #1 )}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\urlPath}
+% A convenience command to save a url path. The string is normalized using
+% the \textsf{hyperref} command \cs{hyper@normalise}. Though we don't require
+% any other packages, you can't do much unless you use \textsf{hyperref} as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\urlPath}[1]{\def\pum@urlName{#1}%
+ \hyper@normalise\pum@urlPath}
+\def\pum@urlPath#1{\expandafter\xdef\pum@urlName{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+History:
+ (2010/09/18 v.8) Replaced \count\z@ by \pun@cnt, and change the
+ increment to global. The index was not correct when there were several
+ submenus.
+ (2009/10/20 v.7) Added \itemindex, which calculates the index of the menu item
+ selected. Can be passed to the handling code as part of the return value.
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.ins b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1223d03e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/popupmenu/popupmenu.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1999-2006 D. P. Story
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `AcroTeX eDucation Bundle'.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+%% License, either version 1.2 of this license or (at your option) any
+%% later version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\filedate{2009/10/15}
+\def\batchfile{popupmenu.ins}
+%
+\input docstrip
+\ifx\generate\undefined
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+ \Msg{* version 2.4 or later.}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex and get a newer one.}
+ \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+ \batchmode
+ \csname @@end\endcsname\end
+\fi
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+\generate
+{%
+ \file{popupmenu.sty}{\from{popupmenu.dtx}{copyright,package}}
+}
+
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space To finish the installation you have to copy the files }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space *.sty, *.cfg and *.def into a directory searched by TeX}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..637775f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1988 @@
+%\iffalse
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Rangen.sty package, 2016-02-19 %%
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2016 D. P. Story %%
+%% dpstory@uakron.edu %%
+%% %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version. %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{rangen}
+%<package> [2014/10/17 v1.4 Rangen: Generate Random Questions (dps)]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
+%\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}
+%\EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+ \GetFileInfo{rangen.sty}
+% \settowidth{\oddsidemargin}{0pt}%
+% \setlength{\evensidemargin}{0pt}
+% \setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}
+% \setlength{\marginparwidth}{0pt}
+% \setlength\textwidth{6in}
+% \hoffset=.5in
+% \hsize = 6in
+ \title{\textsf{Rangen}\texorpdfstring{\\}{:} Random Generation of Integer, Rational, and Real Numbers with
+ Applications to the \texttt{exercise}, \texttt{quiz}, and \texttt{shortquiz} environments of \textsf{Exerquiz}}
+ \author{D. P. Story\\
+ Email: \texttt{dpstory@uakron.edu}}
+ \date{processed \today}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \let\Email\texttt
+ \DocInput{rangen.dtx}
+ \PrintIndex
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \MakeShortVerb{|}
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\def,\edef,\gdef,\xdef,\global,\long,\let}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\string,\the,\ifx,\else,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\relax,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareTextCommand,\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This package provides some commands for creating randomly generated integers, rational,
+% and real numbers. There are options for specifying constraints on the generation of the numbers.
+% Companion JavaScript functions are developed to use these random numbers as part of a
+% question in a \texttt{shortquiz} or \texttt{quiz}. The syntax of this package can be used
+% to pose number-related questions, the JavaScript can be used to create the answer to the
+% question based on a formula. You'll have to see it to believe it.
+%
+% \section{The Main Code}
+%
+% \subsection{Declare Options}
+%
+% This package has one option, other options are passed to the really nice \textsf{lcg} Package,
+% by Erich Janka (\texttt{janka@utanet.at}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\seedCnt
+\DeclareOption{testmode}{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.seed}{}{\def\thisseed{1}}%
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{seed=\thisseed}{lcg}%
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\reseedEachRun}%
+}
+\def\reseedEachRun{%
+ \seedCnt=\thisseed
+ \advance\seedCnt1\relax
+ \newwrite \rngWrite
+ \immediate\openout\rngWrite \jobname.seed
+ \immediate\write\rngWrite{\string\def\string\thisseed{\the\seedCnt}}
+ \immediate\closeout\rngWrite
+}
+\def\RNG@Dec{.}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lcg}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{lcg}[2008/09/10]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save the seed value so we can reproduce the same pseudo-random number sequence.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\rng@saveSeed{\the\cr@nd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There are three data types: Integer, Rational, and Real. The following macros
+% gives each of these types a numerical value, 0, 1 and 2, respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\loopCnt
+\def\maxLoopLimit{10}
+\def\typeCodeForz{0}
+\def\typeCodeForq{1}
+\def\typeCodeForr{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some scratch count registers
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\rng@cnta
+\newcount\rng@cntb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A random variable is specified using a control sequence, e.g. \cs{a}. The following macro
+% extracts the underlying name of the command, e.g. \verb+\@gtVarName{\a}+ expands to \texttt{a},
+% and returns the name as the expansion of the macro \cs{@varName}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@getVarName#1{%
+ \edef\@varName{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The command \cs{@getVarType} takes one argument, a random variable, e.g., \cs{a}. This
+% command defines a macro \cs{varType} which expands to the data type the random variable is.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@getVarType#1{%
+ \@getVarName{#1}\edef\varType{\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{GCD and Rational Reduction Commands}
+% \begin{macro}{\gcd}
+% Here we use Euclid's Algorithm to find the greatest common divisor of two integers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gcd#1#2{{% #1 = a, #2 = b
+ \ifnum#2=0 \edef\next{#1}\else
+ \@tempcnta=#1 \@tempcntb=#2 \divide\@tempcnta by\@tempcntb
+ \multiply\@tempcnta by\@tempcntb % q*b
+ \@tempcntb=#1
+ \advance\@tempcntb by-\@tempcnta % remainder in \@tempcntb
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb=0
+ \@tempcnta=#2
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta < 0 \@tempcnta=-\@tempcnta\fi
+ \xdef\gcd@next{\noexpand%
+ \def\noexpand\thegcd{\the\@tempcnta}}%
+ \else
+ \xdef\gcd@next{\noexpand\gcd{#2}{\the\@tempcntb}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}\gcd@next
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\lcm}
+% Now compute the least common multiple
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lcm#1#2{% #1 = a, #2 = b
+ \gcd{#1}{#2}%
+ {\@tempcnta=#1
+ \multiply\@tempcnta by#2
+ \divide\@tempcnta by\thegcd
+ \xdef\thelcm{\the\@tempcnta}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\amodb}
+% Modular arithmetic \texttt{a mod b}, returns its results
+% as a macro \cs{retnmod}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\amodb#1#2{% #1 = a, #2 = b
+ {\@tempcnta=#1
+ \divide\@tempcnta by#2
+ \multiply\@tempcnta by#2
+ \@tempcntb=#1
+ \advance\@tempcntb by-\@tempcnta
+ \xdef\retnmod{\the\@tempcntb}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\reduceFrac}
+% Reduce a fraction to lowest terms. The first argument is the numerator and the second
+% argument is the denominator. This command computes the \texttt{gcd} of the two integers,
+% divides each by the \texttt{gcd}, and returns the results in the two scratch count
+% registers \cs{@tempcnta} and \cs{@tempcntb}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\reduceFrac[2]
+{%
+ \gcd{#1}{#2}{\@tempcnta=#1 \divide\@tempcnta by\thegcd
+ \@tempcntb=#2 \divide\@tempcntb by\thegcd
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb<0\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Always have the denominator as positive.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcntb=-\@tempcntb
+ \@tempcnta=-\@tempcnta
+ \fi
+ \xdef\rfNumer{\the\@tempcnta}\xdef\rfDenom{\the\@tempcntb}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\convertRatTo}
+% Converts a fraction \texttt{a/b} (\texttt{\#1/\#2}) to a denominator of \texttt{\#3}. Will return
+% new numerator in \cs{rnd@Cnta} register. This will be exact if
+% \texttt{\#2} divides \texttt{\#3}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\convertRatTo#1#2#3{{%
+ \@tempcnta=#3
+ \multiply\@tempcnta by#1
+ \divide\@tempcnta by#2
+ \xdef\rng@retn@num{\the\@tempcnta}%
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\RNGadd}
+% This is the support for rational arithmetic (addition and subtraction).
+% Adds two rational numbers, \texttt{\#1} and \texttt{\#2} together. These two rational numbers must have been defined
+% already, possibly by \cs{defineQ}. Usage: \verb+\RNGadd\a\b+. This macro returns a rational number:
+% the numerator in the \cs{rfNumer} command, and the denominator in the \cs{rfDenom} command.
+% For example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\defineQ\a{1}{3}\defineQ\b{3}{5}\RNGadd\a\b
+%\makeatletter
+%The sum of $\frac{\nOf\a}{\dOf\a} + \frac{\nOf\b}{\dOf\b}
+% = \frac{\rfNumer}{\rfDenom}$
+%\makeatother
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This code typesets as $\frac{1}{3}+\frac{3}{5}=\frac{14}{15}$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\RNGadd[2]{%
+ \rng@cnta=\nOf#1 \multiply\rng@cnta by\dOf#2
+ \rng@cntb=\nOf#2 \multiply\rng@cntb by\dOf#1
+ \advance\rng@cnta by\the\rng@cntb
+ \rng@cntb=\dOf#1 \multiply\rng@cntb by\dOf#2
+ \reduceFrac{\the\rng@cnta}{\the\rng@cntb}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% This is a simple macro for detecting if the argument \texttt{\#1}
+% is a macro or not. Used when interval definitions of the
+% \cs{RandomZ/Q/R} macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@isControl#1{\@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ {\let\rng@isC@ntrol=0}{\let\rng@isC@ntrol=1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This command determines if its argument has an \texttt{*}
+% prefixed or post-fixed to its argument.
+% If \cs{rng@isStariii} equals \texttt{*}, then an \texttt{*} exists.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item If there is no \texttt{*}, then the argument is \texttt{\#1}
+% \item \cs{rng@isStariii} equals \texttt{*}, there is \texttt{*},
+% If the argument has the form \cs{*a}, then \cs{rng@isStari} is \cs{@empty}
+% and the argument, stripped of the \texttt{*}, is given as \cs{rng@isStarii}
+% \item \cs{rng@isStariii} equals \texttt{*}, there is \texttt{*},
+% If the argument has the form \cs{a*}, then \cs{rng@isStarii} is \cs{@empty}
+% and the argument, stripped of the \texttt{*}, is given as \cs{rng@isStari}
+%\end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@existStar#1{\rng@existSt@r#1**\@nil}
+\def\rng@existSt@r#1*#2*#3\@nil{\def\rng@isStari{#1}%
+ \def\rng@isStarii{#2}\def\rng@isStariii{#3}%
+}
+\def\rng@NameEndpoint#1{%
+ \ifx\rng@isStari\@empty
+ \edef#1{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@isStarii}%
+ \else\ifx\rng@isStarii\@empty
+ \edef#1{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@isStari}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Define an Integer and a Rational}
+% \begin{macro}{\defineZ}
+% Define a integer for use in other macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\defineZ[2]
+{%
+ \@getVarName#1\relax
+ \expandafter\def\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname{0}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{1}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{#2}\edef\inline@TeXfmt{#2}%
+ \ifnum#2=1\relax\rng@makeOneFmtDefns
+ \else\ifnum#2=-1\relax\rng@makeMinusOneFmtDefns
+ \else\rng@makeOtherFmtDefns\fi\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\defineQ}
+% The following macro defines a rational number. Usage
+% \verb+\defineQ\a{1}{2}+. This defines the rational number 1/2 and
+% gives it a name, \cs{a}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\defineQ[3]
+{%
+ \@getVarName#1\relax
+ \expandafter\def\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname{1}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{#3}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{\frac{#2}{#3}}\edef\inline@TeXfmt{#2/#3}%
+ \ifnum#2=#3\relax\rng@makeOneFmtDefns
+ \else\ifnum#2=-#3\relax\rng@makeMinusOneFmtDefns
+ \else\rng@makeOtherFmtDefns\fi\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{#2/#3}%
+ \simplifyCurrentQ
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\defineR}
+% This macro computes: (1) \cs{rng@intpart}; (2) \cs{rng@fracpart};
+% (3) \cs{rndnDec} (the number of decimals of the fractional part);
+% (4) \cs{rndPower} (the power of ten determined by \cs{rndnDec}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\defineR}[2]{%
+ \@getVarName{#1}\RNGparseDec{#2}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname{2}%
+ \reduceFrac{\rng@intpart\rng@fracpart}{\rndPower}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{\rfNumer}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{\rfDenom}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{#2}\edef\inline@TeXfmt{#2}%
+ \ifnum\rfNumer=1\relax\rng@makeOneFmtDefns
+ \else\ifnum\rfNumer=-1\relax\rng@makeMinusOneFmtDefns
+ \else\rng@makeOtherFmtDefns\fi\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \simplifyCurrentR
+}
+\newcommand{\simplifyCurrentR}{%
+ \ifnum\csname d@\@varName\endcsname=1
+ \expandafter\defineZ
+ \csname\@varName\endcsname{\csname n@\@varName\endcsname}\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@makeOneFmtDefns{%
+% inline
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName!e\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName!c\endcsname{}%
+% display
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName*e\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName*c\endcsname{}%
+}
+\def\rng@makeMinusOneFmtDefns{%
+% inline
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName!e\endcsname{-1}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName!c\endcsname{-}%
+% display
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName*e\endcsname{-1}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\@varName*c\endcsname{-}%
+}
+\def\rng@makeOtherFmtDefns{%
+% inline
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!e\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!c\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+% display
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*e\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*c\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Parse a Number}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Parsing a Rational}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RNGparseRat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RNGparseRat#1{\expandafter\@chkslash#1//\@nil}
+\def\@chkslash#1/#2/#3\@nil{%
+ \def\rng@num{#1}\def\rng@denom{#2}%
+ \def\rng@parseQ@iii{#3}%
+ \ifx\rng@denom\@empty\def\rng@denom{1}\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Parsing a Real}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RNGparseDec}
+% The argument \texttt{\#1} is a decimal number (or integer)
+% This macro computes: (1) \cs{rng@intpart}; (2) \cs{rng@fracpart};
+% (3) \cs{rndnDec} (the number of decimals of the fractional part);
+% (4) \cs{rndPower} (the power of ten determined by \cs{rndnDec}).
+% These variables will be overwritten the next time this command
+% is executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RNGparseDec}[1]{\edef\parse@argi{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@chkdec\parse@argi..\@nil}
+\def\@chkdec#1.#2.#3\@nil{%
+ \def\rng@intpart{#1}\def\rng@fracpart{#2}%
+ \def\rng@parseR@iii{#3}\rng@getnDec}
+\def\rng@getnDec{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifx\rng@fracpart\@empty\gdef\rndnDec{0}\gdef\rndPower{1}\else
+ \count0=0\relax\count2=1\relax
+ \expandafter\cntNumDec\rng@fracpart\end\fi
+ \endgroup}
+\def\cntNumDec#1#2\end{%
+ \advance\count0by1
+ \def\rng@arg{#2}%
+ \ifx\rng@arg\@empty
+ \xdef\rndnDec{\the\count0}%
+ \xdef\rndPower{1\@nameuse{rng@tz\the\count0}}%
+ \let\rng@next\relax
+ \else
+ \def\rng@next{\cntNumDec#2\end}%
+ \fi\rng@next
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\nDivisionsPowerOfTen}
+% This is a control of how many nodes to create in an interval
+% of real numbers, as defined by \cs{RandomR}. The argument is
+% an integer between 1 and 4 inclusive.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\nDivisionsPowerOfTen}[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \count0=#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count0>4\relax
+ \PackageError{rangen}{Number of subdivisions too large}%
+ {Reduce the argument of \string\nDivisionsPowerOfTen.}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum\count0<1\relax
+ \PackageError{rangen}{Number of subdivisions too large}%
+ {Increase the argument of \string\nDivisionsPowerOfTen.}%
+ \fi\fi
+ \xdef\RNGpowerOfTen{1\@nameuse{rng@tz#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\nDivisionsPowerOfTen{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%\subsection{Creating Random Things}
+%\subsubsection{Random Integer}
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomZ}
+% Randomly generates an integer in the specified range of values.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%[#1] Optional parameter to modify the variable.
+% #2 The random variable being defined, e.g., \a
+% #3 lower limit of random integer
+% #4 upper limit of random integer
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\RandomZ[4][]
+{%
+ \def\rng@ne@values{}%
+ \setkeys{rangen}{ne,#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now see if there is an \texttt{*}, and get un-stripped
+% argument.
+%
+% The \cs{rng@isControl} lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 0 if the arg is undefined,
+% and lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 1 if it is defined.
+% Check the left endpoint:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=0\let\rng@CtrlUEP=0%
+ \let\rng@makeLEPStrict=0\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=0%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Left endpoint.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#3}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@LEP}%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*\edef\tmp@exp{%
+ \noexpand\rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=1\let\rng@makeLEPStrict=1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The LEP is a control sequence with a star, we need to increment the value
+% of \cs{rng@LEP} to the next largest integer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@LEP
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\expandafter\nOf\rng@LEP pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\expandafter\dOf\rng@LEP
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@intpart
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@intpart
+ \fi
+ \advance\rng@cnta by1\relax
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{\the\rng@cnta}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence but has a star
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#3}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=1%
+ \def\rng@LEP{#3}%
+ \@getVarType{#3}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{#3}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\nOf{#3}pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\dOf{#3}%
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@intpart}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@intpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A number, no star
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{\rng@LEP}{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Right endpoint.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#4}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@UEP}%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*\edef\tmp@exp{%
+ \noexpand\rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlUEP=1\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The UEP is a control sequence with a star, we need to increment the value
+% of \cs{rng@UEP} to the next largest integer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@UEP
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\expandafter\nOf\rng@UEP pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\expandafter\dOf\rng@UEP
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@intpart
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@intpart
+ \fi
+ \advance\rng@cnta by-1\relax
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{\the\rng@cnta}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence but has a star
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#4}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlUEP=1%
+ \def\rng@UEP{#4}%
+ \@getVarType{#4}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{#4}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\nOf{#4}pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\dOf{#4}%
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A number, no star, assume it is an integer
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{\rng@UEP}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \textbf{To Do.} Check if LEP is less than UEP, if not, notify user.
+% Save the random variable, e.g., \cs{a}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@currentName{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Record the variable type
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@getVarName{#2}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname{0}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save the range of this variable
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\edef\csname first@\@varName\endcsname{\rng@LEP}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname last@\@varName\endcsname{\rng@UEP}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now get a value for the variable using \cs{rand}, defined in \texttt{lcg}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@chgrand[first=\rng@LEP,last=\rng@UEP]\rand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now define the integer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{#2}{\arabic{rand}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Constraints}
+% We have a random Z, we now try to satisfy the \texttt{ne} condition.
+%
+% The macro \cs{rangen@ne} can be of the form \verb!{1,3,4,5}!. We try to
+% satisfy all the conditions specified by \cs{rangen@ne}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rangen@ne\@empty\else\loopCnt=0\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We will try a total number of \cs{maxLoopLimit} to meet the required
+% conditions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@whilenum\loopCnt<\maxLoopLimit\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set \cs{rng@cnta=1}, if \cs{rng@cnta} is still 1 at the end of this
+% loop, the condition is satisfied.
+% conditions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@cnta=1\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use a \cs{@for} loop to run through all the NE values
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\ne@@tmp:=\rangen@ne\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the current RV is equal to the current NE value, we fail, so we
+% ``and'' a zero into the \cs{rng@cnta} register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\value{rand}=\ne@@tmp\relax
+ \multiply\rng@cnta0\relax
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \dots otherwise, we ``and'' a one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \multiply\rng@cnta1\relax
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{rng@cnt} is still equal to 1, all conditions have been met,
+% in this case we set \verb!\loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit! so we can exit the outer loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\rng@cnta=1\relax % all conditions met
+ \loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \else % if \rng@cnta \ne 1, try again
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, we increment the loop, see if we have gone the limit, if
+% not, loop back with a new random choice.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\loopCnt1\relax
+ \ifnum\loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \PackageWarning{rangen}{Not all conditions met
+ after \maxLoopLimit\space tries}%
+ \else
+ \rng@chgrand[first=\rng@LEP,last=\rng@UEP]\rand
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Whether we fail or succeed, we'll go with the last RV. Hopefully, the
+% author is aware of the log file, and re-compile, possibly with a
+% wider range for the variable, or with a larger value of \cs{maxLoopLimit}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineZ{#2}{\arabic{rand}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\updateZ#1#2{%
+ \@getVarName#1\relax
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\subsubsection{Random Rational}
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomQ}
+% Randomly generate a rational number. The parameters for \cs{RandomQ} are
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%[#1] Optional parameter to modify the variable.
+% #2 The random variable being defined, e.g., \a
+%[#3] maximum denominator permitted (optional)
+% #4 rational number for lower endpoint of range
+% #5 rational number for upper endpoint of range
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Here, it is assume that the first rational number is less than the second. This macro
+% will randomly generate a rational number between rat1 and rat2, with a maximum denominator
+% specified in \texttt{\#3}.
+%
+% \medskip\noindent\textbf{Note: }To allow for random endpoints, if one or both are real numbers, we convert
+% them to rational numbers in \cs{@RandomQ}.
+%
+% We begin by getting the first two parameters:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%[#1] Optional parameter to modify the variable.
+% #2 The random variable being defined, e.g., \a
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomQ}[2][]
+{%
+ \setkeys{rangen}{ne,#1}%
+ \def\rq@currentName{#2}%
+ \@RandomQ
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use \cs{@RandomQ} to get the last three parameters of \cs{RandomQ}.
+% If the endpoints are not rational, they are converted to rationals.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%[#1] maximum denominator permitted (optional)
+% #2 rational number for lower endpoint of range
+% #3 rational number for upper endpoint of range
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@RandomQ}[3][]
+{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now see if there is an \texttt{*}, and get un-stripped
+% argument.
+%
+% The \cs{rng@isControl} lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 0 if the arg is undefined,
+% and lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 1 if it is defined.
+% Check the left endpoint:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=0\let\rng@CtrlUEP=0%
+ \let\rng@makeLEPStrict=0\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=0%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Left endpoint}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#2}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@LEP}%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*\edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=1\let\rng@makeLEPStrict=1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The LEP is a control sequence we get its type and convert to rational
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}{1}%
+ \or % rational
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \defineQ{\noexpand\rng@LEP}{\expandafter\nOf\rng@LEP}%
+ {\expandafter\dOf\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence but has a star, a number, we assume rational
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RNGparseRat{\rng@LEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, is it a control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#2}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \@getVarType{#2}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{#2}{1}%
+ \or % rational
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{\nOf{#2}}{\dOf{#2}}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{#2}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@LEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else % a number, required to be rational
+ \RNGparseRat{#2}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@LEP}{\rng@num}{\rng@denom}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Right endpoint}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#3}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@UEP}%%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*%
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlUEP=1\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The UEP is a control sequence we get its type and convert to rational
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}{1}%
+ \or % rational
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \defineQ{\noexpand\rng@UEP}{\expandafter\nOf\rng@UEP}%
+ {\expandafter\dOf\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence but has a star, a number, we assume rational
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RNGparseRat{\rng@UEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, is it a control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#3}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \@getVarType{#3}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{#3}{1}%
+ \or % rational
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\nOf{#3}}{\dOf{#3}}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{#3}%
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@UEP}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@intpart}{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \fi
+ \else % a number, required to be rational
+ \RNGparseRat{#3}%
+ \defineQ{\rng@UEP}{\rng@num}{\rng@denom}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \@@RandomQ{#1}{\nOf{\rng@LEP}}{\dOf{\rng@LEP}}%
+ {\nOf{\rng@UEP}}{\dOf{\rng@UEP}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Once all the parameters have been acquired, and
+% any needed conversions are made, we call \cs{@@RandomQ} which
+% actually generates the random rational.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% #1 maximum denominator permitted
+% #2 numerator of first rational
+% #3 denominator of first rational
+% #4 numerator of second rational
+% #5 denominator of second rational
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@@RandomQ}[5]
+{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now take parameters \texttt{\#2}--\texttt{\#5}, and make into two rationals
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \updateQ\@rqi{#2}{#3}\updateQ\@rqii{#4}{#5}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Find least common multiple between \texttt{\#3}, \texttt{\#5} and \texttt{\#1}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \lcm{#3}{#5}\edef\@thelcm{\thelcm}%
+ \def\@maxDenom{#1}%
+ \ifx\@maxDenom\@empty\edef\@maxDenom{\@thelcm}\else
+ \lcm{\@thelcm}{#1}\edef\@thelcm{\thelcm}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now convert all rationals to have a denominator of \cs{@thelcm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \convertRatTo{\nOf\@rqi}{\dOf\@rqi}{\@thelcm}%
+ \updateQ\@@rqi{\rng@retn@num}{\@thelcm}%
+ \convertRatTo{\nOf\@rqii}{\dOf\@rqii}{\@thelcm}%
+ \updateQ\@@rqii{\rng@retn@num}{\@thelcm}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% get divisor
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@cnta=\@thelcm \divide\rng@cnta by\@maxDenom
+ \edef\@divisor{\the\rng@cnta}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Round up lower limit
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@cnta=\nOf\@@rqi
+ \divide\rng@cnta by\@divisor
+ \advance\rng@cnta by1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Round down the upper limit
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@cntb=\nOf\@@rqii\divide\rng@cntb by\@divisor
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a strict inequality is requested, we creep in a little.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if\rng@makeLEPStrict1\advance\rng@cnta1\relax\fi
+ \if\rng@makeUEPStrict1\advance\rng@cntb-1\relax\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% construct numerator
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@getVarName\rq@currentName
+ \let\save@varName\@varName
+ \expandafter\edef\csname first@n@\@varName\endcsname{\the\rng@cnta}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname last@n@\@varName\endcsname{\the\rng@cntb}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname first@d@\@varName\endcsname{\@maxDenom}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname last@d@\@varName\endcsname{\@maxDenom}%
+ \edef\rng@LEP{\csname first@n@\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \edef\rng@UEP{\csname last@n@\@varName\endcsname}%
+%\typeout{\@varName: first=\rng@LEP,last=\rng@UEP}%
+ \rng@chgrand[first=\rng@LEP,last=\rng@UEP]\rand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Record the random variable name, e.g., \cs{a}, ...
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@currentName\rq@currentName
+ \expandafter\@getVarName\rq@currentName
+ \expandafter\defineQ\@currentName{\arabic{rand}}{\@maxDenom}%
+ \simplifyCurrentQ
+ \expandafter\defineQ\@currentName{\expandafter\nOf\@currentName}%
+ {\expandafter\dOf\@currentName}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph*{Constraints}
+%
+% We now attempt to satisfy the NE constraints.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rangen@ne\@empty\else\loopCnt=0\relax
+ \@whilenum\loopCnt<\maxLoopLimit\do{%
+ \rng@cnta=1\relax
+ \@for\ne@@tmp:=\rangen@ne\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define a rational by the name of \cs{cmp@Name}, then make it have
+% the same denominator as \cs{@currentName}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\save@currentName\rq@currentName
+ \RNGparseRat{\ne@@tmp}%
+ \defineQ{\cmp@Name}{\rng@num}{\rng@denom}%
+ \let\@varName\save@varName
+ \syncronizeQs{\@varName}%
+ \ifnum\csname n@\@varName\endcsname=\n@cmp@Name
+ \multiply\rng@cnta0\relax
+ \else
+ \multiply\rng@cnta1\relax
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ifnum\rng@cnta=1\relax % all conditions met
+ \loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \else % if \rng@cnta \ne 1, try again
+ \advance\loopCnt1\relax
+ \ifnum\loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \PackageWarning{rangen}{Not all conditions met
+ after \maxLoopLimit\space tries}%
+ \else
+ \rng@chgrand[first=\rng@LEP,last=\rng@UEP]\rand
+ \expandafter\@getVarName\rq@currentName
+ \expandafter\defineQ\@currentName{\arabic{rand}}%
+ {\@maxDenom}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \simplifyCurrentQ
+ \expandafter\defineQ\@currentName{\expandafter\nOf\@currentName}%
+ {\expandafter\dOf\@currentName}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the denominator is equal to 1, let's change the data type to an integer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@currentName\rq@currentName
+ \expandafter\@getVarName\rq@currentName
+ \ifnum\csname d@\@varName\endcsname=1\relax\expandafter
+ \defineZ\@currentName{\expandafter\nOf\@currentName}%
+ \fi
+ \simplifyCurrentQ
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\updateQ}
+% Updates the value of a rational number, its numerator and denominator
+% without changing any of the format macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\updateQ[3]
+{%
+ \@getVarName#1\relax
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{#2/#3}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{#3}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% A macro for performing routine adjustments on a rational number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\simplifyCurrentQ
+{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Reduce fraction: Reduce the fraction to its lowest terms.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reduceFrac{\csname n@\@varName\endcsname}%
+ {\csname d@\@varName\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{reduceFrac} returns results in \cs{@tempcnta} and \cs{@tempcntb}, now
+% update the numerator and denominator
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{\rfNumer}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{\rfDenom}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the numerator is zero, then zero out \cs{@varName} and special format
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\csname n@\@varName\endcsname=0
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{0}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{0}\edef\inline@TeXfmt{0}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If numerator equals denominator, just replace by 1
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\csname n@\@varName\endcsname=\csname d@\@varName\endcsname
+ \expandafter\defineZ\csname\@varName\endcsname{1}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If numerator equals -denominator, just replace by -1
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\csname n@\@varName\endcsname
+ =-\csname d@\@varName\endcsname
+ \expandafter\defineZ\csname\@varName\endcsname{-1}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If denominator equals 1, modify value; otherwise, ok.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\csname d@\@varName\endcsname=1
+ \expandafter\defineZ\csname\@varName\endcsname
+ {\csname n@\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\edef\csname \@varName\endcsname{%
+ \csname n@\@varName\endcsname/%
+ \csname d@\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{%
+ \frac{\csname n@\@varName\endcsname}
+ {\csname d@\@varName\endcsname}}%
+ \edef\inline@TeXfmt{%
+ \csname n@\@varName\endcsname/%
+ \csname d@\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname\@varName*\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\nOf}
+% \begin{macro}{\dOf}
+% \begin{macro}{\iOf}
+% \begin{macro}{\typeOf}
+% User access to numerator and denominator of random variables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\nOf[1]{\csname n@\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname}
+\newcommand\dOf[1]{\csname d@\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For a variable created by \cs{RandomL}, the index of the number chosen (1-based)
+% can be accessed through the \cs{iOf} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\iOf}[1]{\csname i@\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Get the type of a RV, \cs{ifnum}\cs{typeOf}\cs{a}=0 (integer), 1 (rational), 2 (real),
+% 3 (literal, created by \cs{RandomP}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\typeOf[1]{%
+ \csname typeof@\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Random Real}
+%
+% We attempt to generate a random real number, in a given interval of real numbers.
+%
+% The following are some data and switches used by \cs{RandomReal}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftrailingzeros\trailingzerosfalse
+\@namedef{rng@tz1}{0}
+\@namedef{rng@tz2}{00}
+\@namedef{rng@tz3}{000}
+\@namedef{rng@tz4}{0000}
+\@namedef{rng@tz5}{00000}
+\@namedef{rng@tz6}{000000}
+\@namedef{rng@tz7}{0000000}
+\@namedef{rng@tz8}{00000000}
+\def\rng@true{true}\def\rng@false{false}
+\newdimen\rng@dima
+\newdimen\rng@dimb
+\newdimen\rng@dimc
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomR}
+% Create a real number at random within the given interval. For example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \RandomR[<key-values>]{\a}{3.45}{6.45}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{round}
+% \begin{macro}{showzeros}
+% The key-value pairs recognized by \cs{RandomZ|Q|R}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rangen}{ne}[]{\edef\rangen@ne{#1}}
+\define@key{rangen}{round}[]{\def\rangen@round{#1}}
+\define@key{rangen}{showzeros}[]{\def\rangen@showzeros{#1}%
+ \ifx\rangen@showzeros\@empty\global\trailingzerostrue\else
+ \ifx\rangen@showzeros\rng@true\global\trailingzerostrue\else
+ \global\trailingzerosfalse\fi\fi}
+\define@key{rangen}{index}[]{\edef\rangen@index{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%[#1] = options
+% #2 = name of real to correct
+% #3 = lower endpoint of interval
+% #4 = upper endpoint of interval
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomR}[4][]{%
+ \setkeys{rangen}{ne,round,showzeros=false,#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now see if there is an \texttt{*}, and get un-stripped
+% argument.
+%
+% The \cs{rng@isControl} lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 0 if the arg is undefined,
+% and lets \cs{rng@isC@ntrol} to 1 if it is defined.
+% Check the left endpoint:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=0\let\rng@CtrlUEP=0%
+ \let\rng@makeLEPStrict=0\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=0%
+ \def\rng@lcg@first{0}\edef\rng@lcg@last{\RNGpowerOfTen}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph{Left endpoint.} Check the left endpoint:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#3}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@LEP}%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*\edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=1\let\rng@makeLEPStrict=1%
+ \def\rng@lcg@first{1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The LEP is a control sequence with a star. Convert LEP to a real
+% number as needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@LEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP\RNG@Dec}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\expandafter\nOf\rng@LEP pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\expandafter\dOf\rng@LEP
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence, but has a star
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#3}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlLEP=1\def\rng@LEP{#3}%
+ \@getVarType{#3}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP\RNG@Dec}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\nOf{#3}pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\dOf{#3}%
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{\rng@LEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A number, no star, number is required to be real
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineR{\rng@LEP}{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph{Right endpoint.} Check the right endpoint:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@existStar{#4}\rng@NameEndpoint{\rng@UEP}%
+ \if\rng@isStariii*\edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \rng@isControl{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% a control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlUEP=1\let\rng@makeUEPStrict=1%
+ \rng@cnta=\rng@lcg@last\advance\rng@cnta-1\relax
+ \edef\rng@lcg@last{\the\rng@cnta}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The UEP is a control sequence with a star. Convert UEP to a real
+% number as needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\tmp@exp{\noexpand%
+ \@getVarType{\expandafter\noexpand\rng@UEP}}\tmp@exp
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP\RNG@Dec}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\expandafter\nOf\rng@UEP pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\expandafter\dOf\rng@UEP
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not a control sequence, but has a star
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% No star, control sequence or not?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@isControl{#4}%
+ \if\rng@isC@ntrol1% control sequence
+ \let\rng@CtrlUEP=1\def\rng@UEP{#4}%
+ \@getVarType{#4}%
+ \ifcase\varType % integer
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP\RNG@Dec}%
+ \or % rational
+ \rng@dima=\nOf{#4}pt
+ \divide\rng@dima by\dOf{#4}%
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \or % real
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{\rng@UEP}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A number, no star, number is required to be real
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \defineR{\rng@UEP}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Prepare to generate the random real
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@currentName{#2}\@getVarName{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save upper and lower endpoints where they are expected to be.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\edef\csname first@\@varName\endcsname{\rng@LEP}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname last@\@varName\endcsname{\rng@UEP}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Get a random real, and declare it to be a real number using \cs{defineR}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@getRandomR
+ \defineR{#2}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Round and remove trailing zeros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rangen@round\@empty\else
+ \RNGround{#2}{#2}{\rangen@round}%
+ \rng@dima=#2pt\relax
+ \defineR{#2}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph{Constraints.} Let's try to apply constraints. We only allow one constraint.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rangen@ne\@empty\else\loopCnt=0\relax
+ \@whilenum\loopCnt<\maxLoopLimit\do{%
+ \rng@cnta=1\relax
+ \@for\ne@@tmp:=\rangen@ne\do{%
+ \rng@dima=#2pt
+ \ifdim\rng@dima=\ne@@tmp pt\relax
+ \multiply\rng@cnta0\relax\else
+ \multiply\rng@cnta1\relax\fi
+ }%
+ \ifnum\rng@cnta=1\relax % all conditions met
+ \loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \else % if \rng@cnta \ne 1, try again
+ \advance\loopCnt1\relax
+ \ifnum\loopCnt=\maxLoopLimit
+ \PackageWarning{rangen}{Not all conditions met
+ after \maxLoopLimit\space tries}%
+ \else
+ \rng@getRandomR
+ \defineR{#2}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Round and remove trailing zeros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rangen@round\@empty\else
+ \RNGround{#2}{#2}{\rangen@round}%
+ \rng@dima=#2pt\relax
+ \defineR{#2}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph{Formatting.} Begin formatting of the real, keys recognized are
+% \texttt{round} and \texttt{showzeros}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rnd@ProcessRealFormat{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We declare our number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@currentName{#2}%
+ \defineR{#2}{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Get a new random real and return it in the \cs{rng@dima}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@getRandomR{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Put the endpoints in dimension registers so we can subtract them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@dima=\rng@LEP pt
+ \rng@dimb=\rng@UEP pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Compute the difference between upper and lower, then strip off the \texttt{pt},
+% to make it a decimal number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\rng@dimb-\rng@dima
+% \edef\r@getDiff{\strip@pt\rng@dimb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Get a random integer from the interval 0 to \cs{RNGpowerOfTen}.
+% the default value of the latter command is 100, and it can be changed
+% using \cs{nDivisionsPowerOfTen}. The idea is to divide the interval
+% from the lower bound to the upper bound into \cs{RNGpowerOfTen} nodes,
+% and we choose one of these nodes are random.
+%
+% If the endpoints where strict, then we changed \cs{rng@lcg@first}
+% from 0 to 1 (if the lower endpoint is strict); and changed
+% \cs{rng@lcg@last} from \cs{RNGpowerOfTen} to \texttt{\string\RNGpowerOfTen-1}
+% (if the upper end point is strict).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rng@chgrand[first=\rng@lcg@first,last=\rng@lcg@last]\rand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Divide the length of the interval by \cs{RNGpowerOfTen},
+% and store the result in \cs{rng@dimb}, then multiply
+% that by \verb!\arabic{rand}!.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \divide\rng@dimb by\RNGpowerOfTen\relax
+ \rng@dimb=\arabic{rand}\rng@dimb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, the left-end point is still in \cs{rng@dima}
+% we add the result in \cs{rng@dimb} to \cs{rng@dima}
+% to compute our random rational.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\rng@dima by\rng@dimb
+}
+\def\rnd@ProcessRealFormat#1{%
+ \ifx\rangen@round\@empty
+ \rng@dima=#1pt\relax
+ \defineR{#1}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \else
+ \RNGround{#1}{#1}{\rangen@round}%
+ \rng@dima=#1pt\relax
+ \defineR{#1}{\strip@pt\rng@dima}%
+ \iftrailingzeros
+ {\RNGparseDec{#1}\count0=\decPls\relax
+ \advance\count0-\rndnDec\relax
+ \ifnum\count0>0\relax\xdef#1{%
+ \rng@intpart\RNG@Dec\rng@fracpart%
+\@nameuse{rng@tz\the\count0}}%
+ \fi}%
+ \defineR{#1}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Random Sign}
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomS}
+% We randomly generate a \texttt{+} or \texttt{-} sign
+% for addition and subtraction. The first optional argument
+% is a rational number between 0 and 1. The default is \texttt{1/2}.
+% This number represents the probably of a \texttt{+} sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomS}[2][1/2]{%
+ \RNGparseRat{#1}%
+ \ifnum\rng@num<0\relax
+ \PackageError{rangen}{A positive numerator is required}%
+ {The rational number must be between 0 and 1}\fi
+ \ifnum\rng@denom<0\relax
+ \PackageError{rangen}{A positive denominator is required}%
+ {The rational number must be between 0 and 1}\fi
+ \ifnum\rng@num>\rng@denom\relax
+ \PackageError{rangen}{The rational must be between 0 and 1}%
+ {The rational number must be between 0 and 1}\fi
+ \rng@chgrand[first=1,last=\rng@denom]\rand
+ \@getVarName{#2}%
+ \ifnum\value{rand}>\rng@num\relax\def#2{-}%
+ \rng@makeMinusOneFmtDefns
+ \def\display@TeXfmt{-}\def\inline@TeXfmt{-}%
+ \else\def#2{+}\rng@makeOneFmtDefns
+ \def\display@TeXfmt{}\def\inline@TeXfmt{}\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName*\endcsname\display@TeXfmt
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!\endcsname\inline@TeXfmt
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Random Number from a List}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomL}
+% Select a number of any type from a comma-delimited list.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \RandomL[key-values]{\RV}{<comma-delimited list>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Currently, the only key recognized is the \texttt{index} key.
+% If the \texttt{index} key is specified, the number whose index is specified
+% is retrieved from the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomL}[3][]{%
+ \let\rangen@index\@empty
+ \setkeys{rangen}{#1}%
+ \rng@cnta=0\relax\@for\@@tmp:=#3\do{%
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax}\edef\n@rng@listItems{\the\rng@cnta}%
+ \ifx\rangen@index\@empty
+ \rng@chgrand[first=1,last=\n@rng@listItems]\rand
+ \else
+ \rng@cnta=\rangen@index
+ \advance\rng@cnta-1\relax
+ \amodb{\rng@cnta}{\n@rng@listItems}%
+ \rng@cnta=\retnmod
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax
+ \value{rand}=\rng@cnta
+ \fi
+ \@getVarName{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname i@\@varName\endcsname{\arabic{rand}}%
+ \rng@cnta=0\relax\@for\@@tmp:=#3\do{%
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax\ifnum\rng@cnta=\arabic{rand}%
+ \edef\rng@choice{\@@tmp}\fi}%
+ \def\@currentName{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now, determine the type of this choice, and make appropriate
+% data type definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RNGparseDec{\rng@choice}%
+ \if\rng@parseR@iii\RNG@Dec\defineR{#2}{\rng@choice}%
+ \else\RNGparseRat{\rng@choice}%
+ \if\rng@parseQ@iii/\defineQ{#2}{\rng@num}{\rng@denom}%
+ \else\defineZ{#2}{\rng@choice}\fi\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \subsubsection{Random Problem from a List}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomP}
+% Select a literal from a comma-delimited list of literals.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \RandomP[key-values]{\RV}{<comma-delimited list>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Currently, the only key recognized is the \texttt{index} key.
+% If the \texttt{index} key is specified, the number whose index is specified
+% is retrieved from the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomP}[3][]{%
+ \let\rangen@index\@empty
+ \setkeys{rangen}{#1}%
+ \rng@cnta=0\relax\@for\@@tmp:=#3\do{%
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax}\edef\n@rng@listItems{\the\rng@cnta}%
+ \ifx\rangen@index\@empty
+ \rng@chgrand[first=1,last=\n@rng@listItems]\rand
+ \else
+ \rng@cnta=\rangen@index
+ \advance\rng@cnta-1\relax
+ \amodb{\rng@cnta}{\n@rng@listItems}%
+ \rng@cnta=\retnmod
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax
+ \value{rand}=\rng@cnta
+ \fi
+ \@getVarName{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname i@\@varName\endcsname{\arabic{rand}}%
+ \rng@cnta=0\relax\@for\@@tmp:=#3\do{%
+ \advance\rng@cnta1\relax\ifnum\rng@cnta=\arabic{rand}%
+ \rng@toks=\expandafter{\@@tmp}\edef#2{\the\rng@toks}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname typeof@\@varName\endcsname{3}\fi}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Random Index}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RandomI}
+% This command creates an implied list of \verb!{1, 2, 3,...,n}!,
+% and randomly selects a number from this list. The result is
+% defined as an integer, and held in the macro \texttt{\#1}.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \Random{\i}{n} --> select \i from {1, 2, 3,...,n} at random
+%\end{verbatim}
+%A random index, \cs{i}, created by \cs{RandomI}, can be used
+%in the \cs{RandomL} command; for example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \RandomL[index=\i]{\a}{17,\rPI,3/4,\rE,88,1/2}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%The value of \cs{a} is determined by the index \cs{i}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\RandomI}[2]{%
+ \rng@chgrand[first=1,last=#2]\rand
+ \defineZ{#1}{\arabic{rand}}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname i@\@varName\endcsname{\arabic{rand}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Some Constants}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\zZero}
+% \begin{macro}{\zOne}
+% \begin{macro}{\zMinusOne}
+% \begin{macro}{\rPI}
+% \begin{macro}{\rE}
+% Define three convenience integers corresponding to $0$, $1$, and $-1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\defineZ{\zZero}{0}
+\defineZ{\zOne}{1}
+\defineZ{\zMinusOne}{-1}
+\defineR{\rPI}{3.1415927}
+\defineR{\rE}{2.7182818}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% This macro takes \cs{@varName} and \cs{cmp@Name} and converts to the same common
+% denominator. This makes it easy to make comparisons between two rational numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\syncronizeQs#1{\edef\sync@arg{#1}%
+ \lcm{\csname d@\sync@arg\endcsname}{\d@cmp@Name}%
+ \edef\@thelcm{\thelcm}%
+ \convertRatTo{\n@cmp@Name}{\d@cmp@Name}{\@thelcm}%
+ \updateQ\cmp@Name{\rng@retn@num}{\@thelcm}%
+ \convertRatTo{\csname n@\sync@arg\endcsname}%
+ {\csname d@\sync@arg\endcsname}{\@thelcm}\expandafter
+ \defineQ\csname\sync@arg\endcsname{\rng@retn@num}{\@thelcm}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Formatting Commands}
+% \begin{macro}{\ds}
+% \begin{macro}{\eds}
+% \begin{macro}{\cds}
+% Displays an alternate representation (\textbf display\textbf style) of the random variable. Usage \cs{ds}\cs{a}.
+% This displays the contents of \cs{display@TeXfmt} for this variable. The value of \cs{display@TeXfmt}
+% is effected by the formatting commands above.
+%
+% For a rational number \cs{a}, the expression \cs{ds}\cs{a} expands either to the special format representation, or
+% to a rational of the form $\frac{p}{q}$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\ds[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1*\endcsname
+}
+\newcommand\eds[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1*e\endcsname
+}
+\newcommand\cds[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1*c\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\fmt}
+% \begin{macro}{\efmt}
+% \begin{macro}{\cfmt}
+% Displays a special format for the random variable. Usage \cs{ds}\cs{a}.
+% This displays the contents of \cs{display@TeXfmt} for this variable.
+% Same as \cs{ds}, but does not display a display style if there is not
+% special formatting.
+%
+% For a rational number \cs{a}, the expression \cs{ds}\cs{a} expands either to the special format representation, or
+% to a rational of the form $p/q$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\fmt[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1!\endcsname
+}
+\newcommand\efmt[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1!e\endcsname
+}
+\newcommand\cfmt[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1!c\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\js}
+% Used within \cs{CorrAnsButton} to get a more precise expansion of a variable. Used with variables
+% that have been defined using \cs{defineDepVar}. When you say \verb+\js\m+, for example,
+% the \cs{eval@JSfmt} is expanded.
+% \par\medskip\noindent
+% \textbf{Usage:} \verb+\CorrAnsButton*{y = \js\m\space x }+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\js[1]{%
+ \expandafter\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1!*\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Commands specialized to Reals}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\RNGround}
+% Round \texttt{\#1} to \texttt{\#3} decimal places, and leave result in \texttt{\#2}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RNGround#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\rng@ctrlName{#1}%
+ \def\rng@sourceName{#2}%
+ \def\rng@nDecPl{#3}%
+ \RNGparseDec{#2}%
+ \ifnum\rndnDec<#3\relax
+ \xdef\theseDigits{\rng@fracpart}%
+ \let\rng@next\relax
+ \else
+ \count0=0\relax
+ \gdef\theseDigits{}%
+ \def\rng@next{\expandafter\@rng@round\rng@fracpart\end}%
+ \fi
+ \rng@next
+ \xdef\decPls{\@ifundefined{save@rng@nDecPl}%
+ {\rng@nDecPl}{\save@rng@nDecPl}}%
+ \ifx\theseDigits\@empty
+ \xdef#1{\rng@intpart}\else
+ \xdef#1{\rng@intpart\RNG@Dec\theseDigits}\fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\@rng@round#1{%
+ \ifx#1\end\let\rng@next\relax
+ \else
+ \ifnum\rng@nDecPl=0\relax
+ \ifnum#1>4\relax
+ \count0=\rng@intpart\relax
+ \ifnum\rng@intpart<0\relax
+ \advance\count0by-1\relax
+ \else
+ \advance\count0by1\relax
+ \fi
+ \xdef\rng@intpart{\the\count0}%
+ \fi
+ \gdef\theseDigits{}%
+ \let\rng@next\rng@gobbletoend
+ \else
+ \advance\count0by1\relax
+ \ifnum\count0=\rng@nDecPl\relax
+ \def\rng@next{\@@rng@round#1}%
+ \else
+ \xdef\theseDigits{\theseDigits#1}%
+ \let\rng@next\@rng@round
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \rng@next
+}
+\def\rng@gobbletoend#1\end{}
+\def\@@rng@round#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\end%
+ \xdef\theseDigits{\theseDigits#1}%
+ \let\rng@next\relax
+ \else
+ \ifnum#2>4\relax\count2=#1\relax
+ \ifnum\count2=9\relax
+ \count0=\rng@nDecPl\relax
+ \ifnum\count0=1\relax
+ \count0=\rng@intpart\relax
+ \ifnum\rng@intpart<0\relax
+ \advance\count0by-1\relax
+ \else
+ \advance\count0by1\relax
+ \fi
+ \xdef\rng@intpart{\the\count0}%
+ \let\rng@next\rng@gobbletoend
+ \else
+ \advance\count0by-1\relax\expandafter
+ \xdef\rng@sourceName{%
+ \rng@intpart\RNG@Dec\theseDigits#1}%
+ \edef\save@rng@nDecPl{\rng@nDecPl}%
+ \edef\rng@next{\noexpand\RNGround{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\rng@ctrlName}%
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\rng@sourceName}%
+ {\the\count0}\noexpand\rng@gobbletoend}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \advance\count2by1\relax
+ \xdef\theseDigits{\theseDigits\the\count2}%
+ \let\rng@next\rng@gobbletoend
+ \fi
+ \else % \ifnum#2<=4
+ \xdef\theseDigits{\theseDigits#1}%
+ \let\rng@next\rng@gobbletoend
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \rng@next
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Used with \cs{CorrAnsButton} and \texttt{rngCorrAnsButton}, like so,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \CorrAnsButton{rEval(\strAns)}*{rngCorrAnsButton\RNGprintf{\%.2f}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RNGprintf#1{("#1",\@gobble}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{User Defined Dependent Variables for JavaScript}
+% \begin{macro}{\defineDepQJS}
+% Define a rational as a function of other integers. This macro defines
+% \cs{fmt} and \cs{ds} for the variable, but its primary use it
+% for \cs{js}. This command is aimed at the JavaScript side of things
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%#1 = name of rational to be defined, e.g., \a
+%#2 = numerator
+%#3 = denominator
+%#4 = \js expression for #1
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Usage:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \defineDepQJS{\m}{\d-\b}{\c-\a}
+% {rFrac(rEval(\nOf\m)/rEval(\dOf\m))}
+% ...
+% \CorrAnsButton{y = \js\m\space x}*{rngCorrAnsButton}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The above example would calculate equation of the line passing through
+% the two points \verb!P(\a,\b)! and \verb!Q(\c,\d)!. The code is used
+% in the \cs{CorrAnsButton} to have the answer appear.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\defineDepQJS[4]{%
+ \@getVarName#1
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@varName\endcsname{(#2)/(#3)}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname n@\@varName\endcsname{(#2)}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname d@\@varName\endcsname{(#3)}%
+ \edef\display@TeXfmt{\csname\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \edef\inline@TeXfmt{\csname\@varName\endcsname}%
+ \def\dv@argiv{#4}\ifx\dv@argiv\@empty
+ \edef\eval@JSfmt{\csname\@varName\endcsname}\else
+ \edef\eval@JSfmt{#4}\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@varName!*\endcsname\eval@JSfmt
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Writing RVs to Solution Files}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@writeCurrentSeed#1{\immediate\write#1{\string\makeatletter
+ \string\global\string\cr@nd=\the\cr@nd\string\relax
+ \string\makeatother}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Token register to hold the verbatim contents of the \texttt{writeRVsTo} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\rng@toks
+\def\wrv@ex@solns{exercises}%
+\def\wrv@ex@quiz{quizzes}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{environment}{writeRVsTo}
+% This environment takes its environment contents and writes it to
+% two files, one file is \cs{jobname\_rvs.cut} which is input back
+% into the source file immediately. The second parameter
+% accepts the string \texttt{exercises} or \texttt{quizzes}, or a write
+% handle to write to an auxiliary file. The environment was designed for
+% use with the \texttt{exercise}, \texttt{quiz}, and \texttt{shortquiz} environments
+% of \textsf{exerquiz}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{writeRVsTo}[2][]
+{%
+ \def\wrv@argii{#2}%
+ \ifx\wrv@argii\wrv@ex@quiz\let\wrv@out\quiz@solns
+ \else\ifx\wrv@argii\wrv@ex@solns\let\wrv@out\ex@solns\else
+ \let\wrv@out#2\fi\fi
+ \rng@writeCurrentSeed\wrv@out
+ \rng@toks={}%
+ \def\verbatim@processline{%
+ \xdef\rng@temp{\the\rng@toks\the\verbatim@line}%
+ \global\rng@toks=\expandafter{\rng@temp}}%
+ \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
+ #1%
+ \verbatim@start
+}{ \immediate\write\wrv@out{\the\rng@toks}%
+ \newwrite\rng@writeRVs
+ \immediate\openout\rng@writeRVs\jobname_rvs.cut
+ \immediate\write\rng@writeRVs{\the\rng@toks}%
+ \immediate\closeout\rng@writeRVs
+ \aftergroup\rng@Input@RVs
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% After the \texttt{writeRVsTo} environment writes the RVs to
+% \cs{jobname\_rvs.cut}. The environment executes
+% \cs{rng@Input@RVs} to input the file back into the source file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@Input@RVs{\InputIfFileExists{\jobname_rvs.cut}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Redefine lcg Package Macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rng@p@stkeysr@nd{%
+ \@rderr@nd% last < first -> swap
+ \cutr@nger@nd% range too big -> cut
+} % end of \def\p@stkeysr@nd
+\def\rng@chgrand{\@ifnextchar[\rng@chgr@nd{\rng@chgr@nd[]}}
+\def\rng@chgr@nd[#1]{%
+ \@tempcnta=\z@
+ \@tempcntb=\z@
+ \setkeys{Init}{#1}%
+ \rng@p@stkeysr@nd%
+ \@utputr@nd%
+} % end of \def\rng@chgrand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{DLJS Support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{insDLJS}[partialExpand]{partial}{Rangen}
+var partre = /rEval|rFrac/;
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The arguments for this function take two forms
+% (1) \texttt{fieldname}, \texttt{theanswer} (the default); (2)
+% \texttt{theformat}, \texttt{fieldname}, \texttt{theanswer}. The later case
+% is created by using the \cs{RNGprintf} command that inserts allows the
+% document author to insert a \texttt{printf} formatting template. For example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \CorrAnsButton{rEval(\strAns)}*{rngCorrAnsButton\RNGprintf{\%.4f}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+function rngCorrAnsButton()
+{
+ var theprecision,fieldname,theanswer;
+ if (arguments.length==4) {
+ var theformat=arguments[0];
+ var fieldname=arguments[1];
+ var theanswer=arguments[2];
+ var thequiz=arguments[3];
+ } else {
+ var fieldname=arguments[0];
+ var theanswer=arguments[1];
+ var thequiz=arguments[2];
+ }
+ theanswer = partialExpand(0,theanswer);
+ if (arguments.length==4)
+ theanswer=util.printf(theformat,eval(theanswer));
+ DisplayAnswer(fieldname,theanswer,thequiz);
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The JavaScript function \texttt{partialExpand} searches through \texttt{Ans} in search of
+% \texttt{rEval} and \texttt{rFrac}. It calls itself recursively to search for the inner most
+% appearances of these two functions. It evaluates these two functions starting with the inner
+% most and working its way outward.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+function partialExpand(level,Ans)
+{
+ Ans = correctPlusMinus(Ans)
+ level += 1;
+\db console.println("Enter level = " + level +": Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ var n=0, m, bP, eP, subExp;
+ while ( true ) {
+\db console.println("Searching a level " + level);\db%
+ try { m = Ans.match(partre); }
+ catch (e) { break; }
+ if ( m != null ) {
+ bP = m.index + m[0].length;
+ eP = FindBalP(Ans, bP, true);
+\db console.println("bP = " + bP + " : eP = " + eP);\db%
+ var subExp = Ans.substring(bP+1, eP);
+\db console.println("Found \'" + subExp%
+ + "\' at level = " + level);\db%
+% subExp = partialExpand(level, subExp);
+ // n = beginning of "rEval",
+ // eP = beginning of balanced parens,
+ // bP = end of balanced parens
+ Ans = Ans.substring(0, m.index)
+ + eval(m[0]+"(level,subExp)") + Ans.substring(eP+1);
+\db console.println("level = " + level%
+ +": New Ans: " + Ans);\db %
+ } else {
+ if ( level == 1 ) {
+\db console.println("Level 1 break");\db %
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+\db console.println("Return Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ Ans = correctPlusMinus(Ans);
+ return Ans;
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Evaluates the value of \texttt{Ans}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+function rEval(level, Ans)
+{
+ level += 1;
+\db console.println("Enter rEval: level = "%
+ + level +": Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ var n=0, m, bP, eP, subExp;
+ while ( true )
+ {
+\db console.println("Searching a level " + level);\db%
+ try { m = Ans.match(partre); }
+ catch (e) { break; }
+ if ( m != null ) {
+ bP = m.index + m[0].length;
+ eP = FindBalP(Ans, bP, true);
+\db console.println("bP = " + bP + " : eP = " + eP);\db%
+ var subExp = Ans.substring(bP+1, eP);
+\db console.println("Found \'" + subExp%
+ + "\' at level = " + level);\db%
+ // n = beginning of "rEval",
+ // eP = beginning of balanced parens,
+ // bP = end of balanced parens
+ Ans = Ans.substring(0, m.index)
+ +eval(m[0]+"(level,subExp)")+Ans.substring(eP+1);
+\db console.println("level = "%
+ + level +": New Ans: " + Ans);\db %
+ } else {
+ Ans = ParseInput(Ans);
+\db console.println("Ready to eval at level = "%
+ + level + ": Ans = " + Ans);\db%
+ with(Math) { Ans = eval( Ans ) };
+\db console.println("After eval at level = "%
+ + level + ": Ans = " + Ans);\db%
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+\db console.println("Return Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ return Ans;
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Evaluates an rational number by evaluating the value of the numerator and denominator separately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+function rFrac(level, Ans)
+{
+ level += 1;
+\db console.println("Enter rFrac level = "%
+ + level +": Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ var n=0, m, bP, eP, subExp;
+ while ( true ) {
+\db console.println("Searching a level " + level);\db%
+ try { m = Ans.match(partre); }
+ catch (e) { break; }
+ if ( m != null ) {
+ bP = m.index + m[0].length;
+ eP = FindBalP(Ans, bP, true);
+\db console.println("bP = "%
+ + bP + " : eP = " + eP);\db%
+ var subExp = Ans.substring(bP+1, eP);
+\db console.println("Found \'" + subExp%
+ + "\' at level = " + level);\db%
+ // n = beginning of "rEval",
+ // eP = beginning of balanced parens,
+ // bP = end of balanced parens
+ Ans = Ans.substring(0, m.index)
+ + eval(m[0]+"(level,subExp)") + Ans.substring(eP+1);
+\db console.println("level = " + level%
+ +": New Ans: " + Ans);\db %
+ } else {
+ var numDenom = Ans.split("/");
+ numDenom[0] = eval(numDenom[0]);
+ numDenom[1] = eval(numDenom[1]);
+ var g = gcd(numDenom[0], numDenom[1]);
+ numDenom[0] /= g;
+ numDenom[1] /= g;
+ if ( numDenom[1] == 1)
+ Ans = numDenom[0];
+ else
+ Ans = numDenom.join("/");
+\db console.println("Reduce: " + numDenom.join("/"));\db%
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+\db console.println("Return Ans: " + Ans);\db%
+ return Ans;
+}
+function correctPlusMinus(Ans)
+{
+ Ans = "" + Ans;
+ Ans = Ans.replace(/\s*([\+-])\s*\1\s*/g, " + ");
+ Ans = Ans.replace(/\s*\+\s*-\s*/g, " - ");
+% Ans = Ans.replace(/\s*\+\s*\+\s*/g, " + ");
+% Ans = Ans.replace(/\s*-\s*-\s*/g, " + ");
+ Ans = Ans.replace(/\s*-\s*\+\s*/g, " - ");
+ return Ans;
+}
+function gcd(a,b)
+{
+ var x = a, y = b, r;
+ while (true)
+ {
+ r = x \% y;
+ if ( r == 0 ) break;
+ x = y;
+ y = r;
+ }
+ return Math.abs(y);
+}
+function lcm (a,b) { return (a*b)/gcd(a,b); }
+\end{insDLJS}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+\endinput
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.ins b/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c9335e7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/rangen/rangen.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1999-2002 D. P. Story
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `Web and Exerquiz Distribution'.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+%% License, either version 1.2 of this license or (at your option) any
+%% later version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\filedate{2001/05/26}
+\def\batchfile{rangen.ins}
+%
+% If you can assume that the target audience for the document all have
+% Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later, then chance the following switch to true,
+% else, leave it as false.
+
+\input docstrip
+\ifx\generate\undefined
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+ \Msg{* version 2.4 or later.}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex and get a newer one.}
+ \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+ \batchmode
+ \csname @@end\endcsname\end
+\fi
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+
+\generate
+{%
+ \file{rangen.sty}{\from{rangen.dtx}{copyright,package}}
+}
+
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space To finish the installation you have to copy the files }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space *.sty, *.cfg and *.def into a directory searched by TeX}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e5ec3639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
+%\iffalse
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Renditions.sty package, 2010-1-29 %%
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2002 D. P. Story %%
+%% dpstory@uakron.edu %%
+%% %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version. %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% History: Noel Vaillant began developing a better renditions.sty
+%% based on my earlier published renditions.sty. Many thanks
+%% to him for starting me off.
+%%---------------------------------------------------------
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{rendition}
+%<package> [2010/01/29 v0.1 rendition: Package for creating multiple renditions from the same source (dps)]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{calc}
+%\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}
+%\EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+\def\CMD#1{\textbackslash#1}
+ \GetFileInfo{renditions.sty}
+ \title{The \textsf{rendition} Package\texorpdfstring{\\[1ex]}{: }Creating multiple renditions (versions)\texorpdfstring{\\[1ex]}{}
+ from the same source file}
+ \author{D. P. Story\\
+ Email: \texttt{dpstory@uakron.edu}}
+ \date{processed \today}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \let\Email\texttt
+ \DocInput{renditions.dtx}
+ \PrintIndex
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \MakeShortVerb{|}
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\def,\edef,\gdef,\xdef,\global,\long,\let}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\string,\the,\ifx,\else,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\relax,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareTextCommand,\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \section{The \textsf{renditions} Package}
+% This is a short package sets up comment environments, called \emph{renditions}. These
+% renditions can be included or excluded according to the value of the
+% \texttt{rendition} option. The basic options of this package are \texttt{max} and \texttt{rendition}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usepackage[max=4,rendition=3]{renditions}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In the above example, \texttt{max=4} declares that there are 4 renditions in the
+% document, the option \texttt{rendition=3} causes the package to include
+% \texttt{rendition3}, and to exclude all the others \texttt{rendition1}, \texttt{rendition2}, and \texttt{rendition4}.
+%
+%The \textsf{renditions} package is a stand-alone package, but it was designed for use with the \textsf{AeB Builder} utility.
+%
+%Below is an example of a document that uses the \textsf{renditions} package.
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{.4\linewidth-5pt}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage[%
+% max=4,
+% rendition=3
+%]{renditions}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\verb!%\rendition{2}!
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\parindent0pt\parskip6pt
+%
+%\begin{document}
+%This is a test file for
+%renditions.
+%
+%\begin{rendition1}
+%Rendition 1
+%\end{rendition1}
+%
+%\begin{rendition2}
+%Rendition 2
+%\end{rendition2}
+%
+%\begin{rendition3}
+%Rendition 3
+%\end{rendition3}
+%
+%\begin{rendition4}
+%Rendition 4
+%\end{rendition4}
+%
+%\end{document}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{minipage}\hfill
+%\begin{minipage}[t]{.6\linewidth-5pt}\parskip\medskipamount
+%There are two options for the \textsf{renditions} package: \texttt{max} and \texttt{rendition}. The value of \texttt{max} sets the maximum number of renditions in the document; the value of the \texttt{rendition} key determines which of the renditions is to be typeset. You can also select the rendition using the \cs{rendition} command, as illustrated to the left. (The \cs{rendition} command in the preamble would override the value of the \texttt{rendition} key.)
+%
+%The various renditions are defined with the \texttt{rendition<n>} environment.
+%These environments are just comment environments created by the \textsf{comments} %package, and they are selectively included or excluded depending on the value of %the rendition defined by either the \texttt{rendition} key or the \cs{rendition} command.
+%
+%The \textsf{rendition} package does modular arithmetic in the case when $\text{rendition} > %\text{max}$. For example, if \texttt{max=4}, and \texttt{rendition=6}, then the rendition %displayed is \texttt{rendition=2}.
+%
+%There is a third way of setting the value of the rendition parameter, and that is %through the \texttt{rendition.cfg} file. If you create a file with the code
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \ExecuteOptionsX{rendition=3}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Then \texttt{rendition=3} is used.
+%\end{minipage}
+%
+%\paragraph*{Default values.}The default value of \texttt{max}, if it is not specified is %3, and the default value of \texttt{rendition} if it is not specified is 1.
+%
+% There should not be a \texttt{rendition<n>} environment with a number, \texttt{<n>}, greater than that specified by \texttt{max}; however,
+% if the value of \texttt{rendition} is greater than \texttt{max}, modular arithmetic
+% is performed, and the rendition numbered \texttt{rendition} Mod \texttt{max} is used.
+%
+%\paragraph*{History.} The core of this package was originally developed
+% for my online testing system TAOAS (The {Acro\negthinspace\TeX} Online
+% Assessment System). In that system, the \texttt{rendition.cfg} approach was used
+% to select a rendition to be used.
+%
+%\section{The Main Code}
+% We use xkeyval to create the two options \texttt{max} and \texttt{rendition}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{max}
+% The maximum number of renditions present in this file. The value of max
+% must be a positive integer, no checking takes place. The default number is
+% 3.
+% \begin{macro}{rendition}
+% The number of the rendition what you want to use for this run of the latex
+% compiler. The default number is 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{max}{\def\ren@numberOf{#1}}
+\def\ren@numberOf{3}
+\DeclareOptionX{rendition}{\def\thisrendition{#1}}
+\def\thisrendition{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% Input the configuration file, if it exists. This file normally contains
+% the line of {\LaTeX} code \verb!\ExecuteOptions{rendition=<n>}!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{rendition.cfg}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Process the options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The comment package is required.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{comment}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Based on the value of \texttt{max}, we create the requested number
+% of rendition environments: \texttt{rendition1}, \texttt{rendition2},\dots,
+% \texttt{rendition<max>}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\save@message\message\let\message\@gobble
+\@tempcnta=0
+\@whilenum\@tempcnta<\ren@numberOf\do{%
+ \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\advance\@tempcntb1
+ \edef\temp@exp{\noexpand\excludecomment{rendition\the\@tempcntb}}%
+ \temp@exp
+ \expandafter\let\csname Afterver\the\@tempcntb Comment\endcsname\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta1
+}\let\message\save@message
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We include the selected version at the beginning of the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\includecomment{rendition\thisrendition}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\rendition}
+% A convenience macro for setting the current renditions. This
+% command defines the command \cs{thisrendition}, which expands
+% to the selected rendition number. If the value of \cs{thisredition}
+% is greater than \texttt{max} (\cs{ren@numberOf}), modular arithmetic
+% is performed, and \cs{thisrendition} is redefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rendition#1{\def\thisrendition{#1}%
+ \ifnum\thisrendition>\ren@numberOf
+ \@tempcnta=\thisrendition
+ \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+ \advance\@tempcnta-1 \divide\@tempcnta\ren@numberOf
+ \multiply\@tempcnta\ren@numberOf
+ \advance\@tempcntb-\@tempcnta
+ \edef\thisrendition{\the\@tempcntb}%
+ \typeout{Modular arithmetic applied: ren=\thisrendition}%
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble{\rendition}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We execute \cs{rendition} for the selected rendition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\rendition\expandafter{\thisrendition}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
+\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.ins b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65cdc4b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/renditions.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 2010 D. P. Story
+%%
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+%% License, either version 1.2 of this license or (at your option) any
+%% later version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\filedate{2010/02/01}
+\def\batchfile{renditions.ins}
+
+\input docstrip
+\ifx\generate\undefined
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+ \Msg{* version 2.4 or later.}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex and get a newer one.}
+ \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+ \batchmode
+ \csname @@end\endcsname\end
+\fi
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+
+\generate
+{%
+ \file{renditions.sty}{\from{renditions.dtx}{copyright,package}}
+}
+
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space To finish the installation you have to copy the files }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space *.sty, *.cfg and *.def into a directory searched by TeX}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/test_ren.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/test_ren.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..169af9e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/renditions/test_ren.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[max=4, rendition=2]{renditions}
+
+%\rendition{3}
+
+\parindent0pt\parskip6pt
+
+\begin{document}
+This is a test file for renditions.
+
+\begin{rendition1}
+Rendition 1
+\end{rendition1}
+
+\begin{rendition2}
+Rendition 2
+\end{rendition2}
+
+\begin{rendition3}
+Rendition 3
+\end{rendition3}
+
+\begin{rendition4}
+Rendition 4
+\end{rendition4}
+
+\end{document} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/doc/richtextman.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/doc/richtextman.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7526f9ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/doc/richtextman.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1106 @@
+% makeindex < aebpro_man.idx > aebpro_man.ind
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+\usepackage[
+ web={centertitlepage,designv,forcolorpaper,latextoc,pro,addtoHyOpts={pagebackref=false}},
+ eforms,
+% linktoattachments,
+ aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+\usepackage{richtext}
+\usepackage{graphicx,array}
+%\usepackage{myriadpro}
+%\usepackage{calibri}
+\usepackage[altbullet]{lucidbry}
+
+%\previewtrue
+%\usepackage{makeidx}
+%\makeindex
+\usepackage{acroman}
+\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand*{\theparagraph}{\texorpdfstring{\protect\P\protect\ }{\textparagraph}}
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+ {\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\theparagraph}%
+ \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{6pt}{-3pt}{\color{\aeb@subsubsectioncolor}\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{5.0em}{1em}} %{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\def\chgCurrLblName#1{\def\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\def\echgCurrLblName#1{\edef\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\makeatother
+
+\getDimsFromGraphic{graphics/dpsweb}{\dpswebW}{\dpswebH}
+
+
+%\urlstyle{rm}
+\urlstyle{sf}
+\let\uif\textsf
+\let\app\textsf
+\def\psf#1{\textbf{\textsf{#1}}}
+\let\amtIndent\leftmargini
+
+\convertcolorspec{named}{red}{RGB}{\rgbRed}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{blue}{RGB}{\rgbBlue}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{red}{HTML}{\htmlRed}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{blue}{HTML}{\htmlBlue}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{magenta}{RGB}{\rgbMagenta}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{magenta}{HTML}{\htmlMagenta}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{webbrown}{HTML}{\htmlWebBrown}
+
+\renewcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont #1}
+
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ university={Acro\negthinspace\TeX.Net},
+ title={\textsf{richtext}: A method of creating rich text strings},
+ author={D. P. Story},
+ email={dpstory@acrotex.net},
+ subject={Documentation for the richtext package from AcroTeX},
+ talksite={\url{www.acrotex.net}},
+ version={v1.0c, 2016/10/03},
+ keywords={AcroTeX, rich text strings},
+ copyrightStatus=True,
+ copyrightNotice={Copyright (C) \the\year, D. P. Story},
+ copyrightInfoURL={http://www.acrotex.net}
+}
+
+\def\dps{$\hbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\hbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\universityLayout{fontsize=Large}
+\titleLayout{fontsize=LARGE}
+\authorLayout{fontsize=Large}
+\tocLayout{fontsize=Large,color=aeb}
+\sectionLayout{indent=-62.5pt,fontsize=large,color=aeb}
+\subsectionLayout{indent=-31.25pt,color=aeb}
+\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt,color=aeb}
+\subsubDefaultDing{\texorpdfstring{$\bullet$}{\textrm\textbullet}}
+
+\widestNumber{0.00.}
+%\pagestyle{empty}
+%\parindent0pt\parskip\medskipamount
+
+\def\dps{$\mbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\mbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\newcount\fldCnt \fldCnt=0
+\def\incFldCnt{\global\advance\fldCnt1\relax}
+
+\frenchspacing
+
+\chngDocObjectTo{\newDO}{doc}
+\begin{docassembly}
+var titleOfManual="The AeB RichText MANUAL";
+var manualfilename="Manual_BG_Print_richtext.pdf";
+var manualtemplate="Manual_BG_Brown.pdf"; // Blue, Green, Brown
+var _pathToBlank="C:/Users/Public/Documents/ManualBGs/"+manualtemplate;
+var doc;
+var buildIt=false;
+if ( buildIt ) {
+ console.println("Creating new " + manualfilename + " file.");
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: _pathToBlank, bHidden: true});
+ var _path=this.path;
+ var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+ _path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+ \docSaveAs\newDO ({ cPath: _path });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: manualfilename, oDoc:this, bHidden: true});
+ f=doc.getField("ManualTitle");
+ f.value=titleOfManual;
+ doc.flattenPages();
+ \docSaveAs\newDO({ cPath: manualfilename });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+} else {
+ console.println("Using the current "+manualfilename+" file.");
+}
+var _path=this.path;
+var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+_path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+\addWatermarkFromFile({
+ bOnTop:false,
+ bOnPrint:false,
+ cDIPath:_path
+});
+\executeSave();
+\end{docassembly}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\selectColors{linkColor=black}
+\tableofcontents
+\selectColors{linkColor=webgreen}
+
+\def\AcroT{Acro\!\TeX}\def\cAcroT{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroT}}
+\def\AcroEB{\AcroT{} eDucation Bundle}\def\cAcroEB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroEB}}
+\def\AcroB{\AcroT{} Bundle}\def\cAcroB{\textcolor{blue}{\AcroB}}
+\def\bUrl{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory}
+
+\hypersetup{linktocpage}
+
+
+%FreeText
+%/C[1.0 1.0 1.0]/Contents(This is test If there a real test, we would all be in trouble.)
+%/CreationDate(D:20160909063701-05'00')
+%/DA(0.898 0.1333 0.2157 rg /Helv 12 Tf)
+%/DS(font: Helvetica,sans-serif 12.0pt; text-align:left; color:#E52237 )
+%/F 4/M(D:20160909065147-05'00')/NM(f8e9e6b1-1651-4c47-9169-8a47c7af23ff)
+%/RC(<?xml version="1.0"?><body xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:xfa="http://www.xfa.org/schema/xfa-data/1.0/" xfa:APIVersion="Acrobat:15.19.0" xfa:spec="2.0.2" style="font-size:12.0pt;text-align:left;color:#E52136;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;font-family:Helvetica,sans-serif;font-stretch:normal">
+%<p dir="ltr">
+%<span style="text-align:justify;color:#FF0000;font-family:Helvetica">
+% This is </span>
+%<span style="text-decoration:line-through;text-align:justify;color:#FF0000;font-weight:bold;font-style:italic;font-family:Helvetica">
+% test</span>
+%<span style="text-align:justify;color:#FF0000;font-family:Helvetica">
+%If there a real test, we would all be in trouble.</span>
+%</p></body>)/Rect[30.1092 174.763 181.964 251.345]/Subj(Text Box)/Subtype/FreeText/T(dpstory)/Type/Annot>>
+
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+Rich text contents for variable text (text fields and editable combo boxes)
+and markup annotations was introduced into the PDF specification beginning
+with PDF 1.5 (\app{Acrobat} and \app{Adobe Reader} version~6). The rich text
+strings are difficult to create for it requires reading from a number of
+sources. The \pkg{richtext} package provides commands and documentation
+needed to ``easily'' produce such rich strings. We demonstrate the results
+using the \pkg{eforms} package (the text field produced by \pkg{hyperref}
+does not support rich text).
+
+References for this material includes the \textsl{PDF
+Reference}~\cite{book:pdfspec}, the XFA specification~\cite{webpage:XFASpec},
+and the CSS2 specification~\cite{webpage:CSS2}. Additionally, the \textsl{JavaScript for
+Acrobat API Reference}~\cite{tech:AcroJS} covers the JavaScript API for
+handling rich text content.
+
+\section{Preamble: Required packages and options}
+
+The package has no options and only requires \pkg{xkeyval} and \pkg{ifxetex} packages.
+The package can produce rich text strings, but to actually use them, you'll need
+the \pkg{eforms} package.
+
+The package works for all drivers \app{dvips}, \app{pdflatex}, \app{xelatex},
+and \app{luatex}. The \pkg{eforms} package can automatically detect all
+drivers except \pkg{dvips}, and that is used by default.
+
+\section{Creating rich text strings}\label{s:CreateRTS}
+
+We begin by illustrating the result of the \pkg{richtext} package, consider the rich text field below.
+
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{Now is the time for
+\span{style={bold,italic,strikeit},color=ff0000}{J\374rgen} and all
+good men to come to the aid of \it{their} \bf{country}. Now is the time for
+\span{style=italic}{all good} women to do the same.}
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para2}{With rich text, we can format the text within
+the text field. As a reader of this rich text field, you can edit the
+contents of the box, feel free to do so.}
+\rtpara[halign=right]{para3}{D. P. Story \span{url=http://www.acrotex.net}{AcroTeX.Net}}
+
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}{skipline}{para3}}
+
+\begin{center}
+%\previewtrue
+\incFldCnt
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}%\DS{\useDS{myDS}}%
+\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{4in}{10\baselineskip}
+\end{center}
+
+To edit the field above, click in the field, press \uif{Ctrl+E} or \uif{Cmd+E} (for \app{Mac OS}) to obtain
+the \uif{Form Field Text Properties} toolbar. By pressing the \uif{More} button, you can see the additional
+properties of the field, as seen in \hyperref[fig:FPtabs]{Figure~\ref*{fig:FPtabs}}.
+
+
+A rich text may have any of several style attributes, many of these are illustrated in the above example.
+As a guide to introducing the attributes, we follow the \uif{Form Field Text Properties} dialog box shown
+in \hyperref[fig:FPtabs]{Figure~\ref*{fig:FPtabs}}.
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]\centering\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}%
+\fbox{\parbox{.5\linewidth-5pt-2\fboxrule}{\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{graphics/fontprops}}}\hspace{10pt}%
+\fbox{\parbox{.5\linewidth-5pt-2\fboxrule}{\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{graphics/paragraphprops}}}\\[6pt]
+\fbox{\parbox{.8\linewidth-2\fboxrule}{\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{graphics/linkprops}}}%
+\caption{The Font, Paragraph and Link tabs}\label{fig:FPtabs}
+\end{figure}
+
+\newtopic\noindent
+The basic command for creating a rich text \emph{paragraph} is \cs{rtpara}:
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\rtpara[\ameta{Para-Font-attrs}]\darg{\ameta{name}}\darg{\ameta{rich-text-paragraph}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\rtpara[!ameta(Para-Font-attrs)]{!ameta(name)}{!ameta(rich-text-paragraph)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{Para-Font-attrs} are key-value pairs (in the {\LaTeX}
+sense) that are described in \hyperref[s:FLtabs]{Sections~\ref*{s:FLtabs}}
+and~\ref{s:Paratab}; these attributes are applied to the paragraph as a
+whole. The \ameta{name} is a unique name to be associated with
+\ameta{rich-text-paragraph} so it can be referenced later from within a text
+field. There are two types of attributes: \uif{Font} and \uif{Paragraph}, as
+guided by \hyperref[fig:FPtabs]{Figure~\ref*{fig:FPtabs}}. For convenience,
+the \uif{Link} attributes (URLs) are classified as \uif{Font}. The optional
+argument of \cs{rtpara} consists of usually \uif{Paragraph} attributes, most
+\uif{Font} attributes are also recognized.
+
+The definition of the first paragraph of the above rich text field reads as
+follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{Now is the time for
+ \span{style={bold,italic,strikeit},color=ff0000}{J\374rgen}
+ and all good men to come to the aid of \it{their}
+ \bf{country}. Now is the time for \span{style=italic}
+ {all good} women to do the same.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+In this example, the optional argument for \cs{rtpara} was used to indent the
+paragraph. The rich text defined here is named \texttt{para1}. The third
+argument, \ameta{rich-text-string}, consists of ordinary text, the \cs{span}
+command used to insert special formatting for text, and certain other
+`short-cut' markups like \cs{it} and \cs{bf}. Note that the umluat (\"{u}) is
+expressed as octal (\cs{374}).
+
+The \cs{span} command is used to format individual sentence fragments. Its
+syntax is,
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\span\darg{\ameta{Font-attrs}}\darg{\ameta{rich-text-string}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\span[!ameta(Font-attrs)]{!ameta(rich-text-string)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{Font-attrs} are \uif{Font} attributes as described in
+\hyperref[s:FLtabs]{Sections~\ref*{s:FLtabs}}; these attributes are applied
+to the string \ameta{rich-text-string} only. The \cs{span} command, as
+described here, is only defined within the third argument
+(\ameta{rich-text-paragraph}) of \cs{rtpara}. This is necessary because
+\cs{span} is a {\TeX} primitive command, and we must not overwrite its
+definition.
+
+When you create a \emph{rich text string} there is a parallel development of a
+\emph{plain text string}, the string without its rich text markup, these two
+(rich and plain strings) are used to populate the values of the \psf{RV} and
+\psf{V} keys of a text field. When you define a rich text paragraph string
+under its own \ameta{name}, you can typeset it (to check the syntax) and its
+plain text counterpart using the \cs{useRV\darg{\ameta{name}}} and
+\cs{useV\darg{\ameta{name}}} commands. For example,
+\begin{quote}\raggedright\ttfamily\makeatletter\def\rt@SC{;\penalty0}%
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{Now is the time for
+\span{style={bold,italic,strikeit},color=ff0000}{J\string\374rgen} and all
+good men to come to the aid of \it{their} \bf{country}. Now is the time for
+\span{style=italic}{all good} women to do the same.}
+\makeatother
+\hspace*{-\leftmargini}\textbf{\cs{useRV\darg{para1}:}}\ \useRV{para1}\\[\baselineskip]
+\hspace*{-\leftmargini}\textbf{\cs{useV\darg{para1}:}}\ \useV{para1}
+\end{quote}
+These commands may also be used to insert the strings into the \psf{RV} and
+\psf{V} keys, respectively; though the \pkg{richtext} package offers an
+alternative technique.
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\uif{Font}}{Font} and
+\texorpdfstring{\uif{Link}}{Link} tabs}\label{s:FLtabs}
+
+In this section, we cover the \uif{Font} and \uif{Link} tabs, as well as other attributes
+not listed on any tab.
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\uif{Font}}{Font} tab}
+
+We discuss the \uif{Font} tab of \hyperref[fig:FPtabs]{Figure~\ref*{fig:FPtabs}}. The
+key-value for each of the attributes is given and described briefly. These key-values
+may appear as \ameta{Font-attrs} or \ameta{Para-Font-attrs}.
+\begin{description}
+%The font family used to draw the text. It is an array of family names to be searched for in order. The first
+%entry in the array is the font name of the font to use. The second entry is an optional generic family name
+%to use if an exact match of the first font is not found. The generic family names are
+%symbol, serif, sans-serif, cursive, monospace, fantasy
+%The default generic family name is sans-serif.
+\item[\uif{Font:}] \texttt{font=\ameta{font\_name}} A font name or a list of
+ font names to be used to display the enclosed text. The first
+ entry is the font name of the font to use. The second font name is
+ typically a generic family name to use if an exact match is not found.
+ The generic family names are \texttt{symbol}, \texttt{serif},
+ \texttt{sans-serif}, \texttt{cursive}, \texttt{monospace}, and
+ \texttt{fantasy}. The default is \texttt{sans-serif}. If a typeface name
+ contains white space, enclose it within single quotes (\texttt{'}).
+\begin{flushleft}\small %\previewtrue
+\verb|\rtpara[font={Arial,sans-serif}]{para1}{This is Arial or a|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|san-serif substitute.}|\\[3pt]
+\rtpara[font={Arial,sans-serif}]{para1}{This is Arial or a san-serif substitute.}%
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp}\\[6pt]
+\verb|\rtpara{para2}{This is \span{font='Myriad Pro'}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|{Myriad Pro} font.}|\\[3pt]
+\rtpara{para2}{This is \span{font='Myriad Pro'}{Myriad Pro} font.}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para2}}\V{\useV{para2}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp}
+\end{flushleft}
+In the second example, only `Myriad Pro' is actually set in the Myriad Pro font; the rest of the sentence
+is typeset in the default font, Helvetica in this case. Use \uif{Ctrl+E} (\uif{Cmd+E}) to inspect the properties
+of these two fields and verify the fonts are Arial, Myriad Pro, and Helvetica.
+
+\item[\uif{Size}:] \texttt{size=\ameta{dec\_num}} The size of the font to
+ be used. The value of \texttt{size} is \ameta{dec\_num}, a (positive)
+ decimal number.
+\begin{flushleft}\small %\previewtrue
+\verb|\rtpara[size=12]{para1}{This is 12pt font, while|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{size=8}{this is 8pt font.} OK?}|\\[6pt]
+\rtpara[size=12]{para1}{This is 12pt font, while \span{size=8}{this is 8pt font.} OK?}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\item[\uif{Baseline Shift:}] \texttt{raise=\ameta{def\_num}} The position of the baseline of the text is determined
+by the \texttt{raise} key. \texttt{raise=6.6} raises the baseline \texttt{6.6pt}, while \texttt{raise=-4} lowers
+it \texttt{4pt}.
+\begin{flushleft}\small
+\verb|\rtpara{para1}{This text \span{raise=6.6}{is raised by|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb| 6.6pt} while this text \span{raise=-4}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|{is lowed by 4pt.} Back to normal baselines.}|\\[6pt]
+\rtpara{para1}{This text \span{raise=6.6}{is raised by 6.6pt} while this text
+\span{raise=-4}{is lowed by 4pt.} Back to normal baselines.}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*4}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\item[\uif{Underline:}]
+ \texttt{ulstyle=\ameta{\upshape{none|ul|2ul|wul|2wul}}} The
+ \texttt{ulstyle} key determines the style of underlining, possible values
+ are \texttt{none} (no underlining), \texttt{ul} (underlining),
+ \texttt{2ul} (double-line underlining), \texttt{wul} (word underlining),
+ and \texttt{2wul} (double-line word underlining).
+\begin{flushleft}\small %\previewtrue
+\verb|\rtpara{para1}{We can \span{ulstyle=ul}{underline in a}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{ulstyle=2ul}{number of different ways}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{ulstyle=wul}{that catch the}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{ulstyle=2wul}{attention of the reader}.|\\[3pt]
+\rtpara{para1}{We can \span{ulstyle=ul}{underline in a} \span{ulstyle=2ul}{number of different ways}
+\span{ulstyle=wul}{that catch the} \span{ulstyle=2wul}{attention of the reader}.}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*4}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\item[\uif{Style}:]
+ \texttt{style=\darg{\upshape{[bold,][italic,][strikeit]}}} Unlike some
+ of the other (choice) keys, the value of the \texttt{style} key is any
+ \emph{subset} of the values listed: for example, \texttt{style=bold}
+ paints the underlying text in bold, \texttt{style=\darg{bold,italic}}
+ yields bold-italic font, and, for a final example,
+ \texttt{style=\darg{italic,strikeit}} typesets its text in
+ strike-through italic. Multiple values must be enclosed in braces
+ (\darg{}) so that \pkg{xkeyval} can correctly parse them.
+\begin{flushleft}\small %\previewtrue
+\verb|\rtpara{para1}{To \span{style=bold}{boldly to go} where|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{style={bold,italic}}{no man has gone}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{style={italic,strikeit}}{prior}|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|\span{style={italic,bold}}{before.}|\\[3pt]
+\rtpara{para1}{To \span{style=bold}{boldly to go} where
+\span{style={bold,italic}}{no man has gone}
+\span{style={italic,strikeit}}{prior}\span{style={italic,bold}}{before.}}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*2}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\item[\uif{Color:}]
+ \texttt{color=\ameta{\upshape{\meta{rrggbb}|\darg{rgb(\meta{rrr,ggg,bbb})}}}}
+ Use this key to color the effected text. There are two
+ methods of defining color:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item[(1)] \meta{rrggbb} uses a 2-digit hexadecimal
+ value for each component;
+ \item[(2)] \texttt{rgb(\meta{rrr,ggg,bbb})} uses a decimal
+ value (0--255) for each component.
+\end{itemize}
+ Because the second form contains
+ commas, it must necessarily be enclosed in braces (\darg{}) to be
+ correctly parsed by \pkg{xkeyval}.
+\begin{flushleft}\small %\previewtrue
+\verb|\rtpara{para1}{This is \span{color={rgb(255,0,0)}}{red} and|
+\hspace*{20pt}\verb|this is \span{color=0000ff}{blue}.|
+\rtpara{para1}{This is \span{color={rgb(255,0,0)}}{red} and this is \span{color=0000ff}{blue}.}\\[3pt]
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp}
+\end{flushleft}
+Things are not as bad as it seems. The \pkg{xcolor} package has the
+wonderful command \cs{convertcolorspec} that converts colors between color
+models. For example, we might define:
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\convertcolorspec{named}{red}{RGB}{\rgbRed}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{blue}{HTML}{\htmlBlue}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{magenta}{RGB}{\rgbMagenta}
+\convertcolorspec{named}{magenta}{HTML}{\htmlMagenta}
+\end{Verbatim}
+We can then use these named colors.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{This is \span{color={rgb(\rgbRed)}}{red} and
+this is \span{color=\htmlBlue}{blue}. We can do magenta two
+ways, using \span{color={rgb(\rgbMagenta)}}{decimal
+components} or using \span{color=\htmlMagenta}{hexadecimal
+components}.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\rtpara{para1}{This is \span{color={rgb(\rgbRed)}}{red} and this
+is \span{color=\htmlBlue}{blue}. We can do magenta two ways,
+using \span{color={rgb(\rgbMagenta)}}{decimal components} or
+using \span{color=\htmlMagenta}{hexadecimal components}.}\par\smallskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*4}\\[6pt]
+%
+Notice that \verb|color={rgb(\rgbMagenta)}|, the value of \texttt{color}, is
+still enclosed in braces since the expansion of \cs{rgbMagenta} contains
+commas.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsubsection{The \texorpdfstring{\uif{Link}}{Link} tab}
+
+We can create a link within rich text by using the \texttt{url} key from within
+the first argument of the \cs{span} command. The syntax is \texttt{url=\ameta{URL}}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at \span{url={http://www.acrotex.net},
+ font='Courier New'}{http://www.acrotex.net}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at \span{url={http://www.acrotex.net},font='Courier New'}{http://www.acrotex.net}}\par\smallskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp}
+\end{quote}
+It appears the \app{Acrobat/Reader} applications format a URL in underlined blue. We can override this however.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at \span{url={http://www.acrotex.net},
+ color=\htmlMagenta,ulstyle=none,font='Courier New'}
+ {http://www.acrotex.net}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at \span{url={http://www.acrotex.net},
+ color=\htmlMagenta,ulstyle=none,font='Courier New'}
+ {http://www.acrotex.net}}
+\par\smallskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp}
+\end{quote}
+Special characters are no problem, with the exception of wrapping a long URL
+around to a different line (usually needed for display purposes):
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at
+ \span{url={http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/%
+ acrotex.html#technical}}{AcroTeX at The University
+ of Akron}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{Visit me at \span{url={http://www.math.uakron.edu/%
+ ~dpstory/acrotex.html#technical}}
+ {AcroTeX at The University of Akron}}\par\smallskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*2}
+\end{quote}
+
+\subsubsection{Miscellaneous markup of the \texorpdfstring{\uif{Font}}{Font} classification}
+
+There are several other attributes that are not key-values, but are
+implemented through {\LaTeX} commands.
+
+\paragraph[Bold and italic]{Bold and italic.}\chgCurrLblName{Bold and italic}\label{para:BandI}
+There are a couple of XHTML
+elements that can also be used for bold and italic.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{bf\darg{\ameta{text}}} expands to \texttt{<b>\ameta{text}</b>} and places
+ \ameta{text} in bold font. May be used within a \cs{span} command.
+ \item \cs{it\darg{\ameta{text}}} expands to \texttt{<i>\ameta{text}</i>} and places
+ \ameta{text} in italic font. May be used within a \cs{span} command.
+\end{itemize}
+Both \cs{bf} and \cs{it} are local commands, undefined outside of the third argument
+of \cs{rtpara}. Do not code \texttt{<b>\ameta{text}</b>} or \texttt{<i>\ameta{text}</i>}
+directly, rather, always use the {\LaTeX} commands \cs{bf} and \cs{it}. \cs{bf} and \cs{it} may be nested.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{We \bf{boldly} say that \it{italic} is used for
+emphasis, but both \bf{\it{drive home the point}}.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{We \bf{boldly} say that \it{italic} is used for emphasis,
+but both \span{color=\htmlBlue}{\bf{\it{drive home the point}}}.}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*2}
+\end{quote}
+
+\paragraph[Subscripts and superscripts]{Subscripts and superscripts.}%
+\chgCurrLblName{Subscripts and superscripts}\label{para:SubSup}
+Subscripts and superscripts are implemented through
+{\LaTeX} commands \cs{sub} and \cs{sup}.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{sub\darg{\ameta{text}}} expands to
+ \texttt{<sub>\ameta{text}</sub>} and places \ameta{text} as a
+ subscript.
+ \item \cs{sup\darg{\ameta{text}}} expands to
+ \texttt{<sup>\ameta{text}</sup>} and places \ameta{text} as a
+ superscript.
+\end{itemize}
+Both \cs{sub} and \cs{sup} are local commands, undefined outside of the third argument
+of \cs{rtpara}. Do not code these raw markups, rather always use \cs{sub} and \cs{sup}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{When we compile $x_2^3$ we get
+\it{x}\sub{2}\sup{3}, nicely typeset or would you prefer
+\it{x}\sup{3}\sub{2}?}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{When we compile $x_2^3$ we get \it{x}\sub{2}\sup{3}, nicely typeset
+ or would you prefer \it{x}\sup{3}\sub{2}?}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*5/2}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\uif{Paragraph}}{Paragraph} tab}\label{s:Paratab}
+
+We begin by following the \uif{Paragraph} tab of
+\hyperref[fig:FPtabs]{Figure~\ref*{fig:FPtabs}}. The top-most region on the \uif{Paragraph} tab
+is labeled \uif{Alignment}. It consists of two separated regions, the one on the left is \emph{Horizontal Alignment},
+the one on the right is \emph{Vertical Alignment}.
+\begin{description}
+ \item[\uif{Alignment}:]\leavevmode
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[Horizontal Alignment:] \texttt{halign=\ameta{\upshape{left|center|right|justify}}}\\The meaning of these
+ key-values are obvious, we'll illustrate with examples.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[halign=left]{para1}{This paragraph is left
+ aligned or flush left. Let's have a few more words
+ to wrap around.}
+\rtpara[halign=center]{para2}{This paragraph is
+ centered. Let's have a few more words to wrap
+ around.}
+\rtpara[halign=right]{para3}{This paragraph is right
+ aligned or flush right. Let's have a few more words
+ to wrap around.}
+\rtpara[halign=justify]{para4}{This paragraph is
+ justified. Space between words are stretched a
+ little to make this happen. It is adequate for
+ our purposes.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[halign=left]{para1}{This paragraph is left aligned or flush left. Let's have a few more words to wrap around.}
+\rtpara[halign=center]{para2}{This paragraph is centered. Let's have a few more words to wrap around.}
+\rtpara[halign=right]{para3}{This paragraph is right aligned or flush right. Let's have a few more words to wrap around.}
+\rtpara[halign=justify]{para4}{This paragraph is justified. Space
+ between words are stretched a little to make this happen. It is adequate for our purposes.}
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{skipline}{para2}{skipline}{para3}{skipline}{para4}} %{skipline}
+\setDefaultStyle{myDS}{font={Helvetica,sans-serif},size=10,color=000000}\par\medskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDS{myDS}}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{12bp*12}
+\end{flushleft}
+Horizontal alignment is applied to individual paragraph, unlike vertical alignment.
+
+ \item[Vertical Alignment:]
+ \texttt{valign=\ameta{\upshape{top|middle|bottom}}} Again,
+ we shall illustrate by example.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[valign=top]{para1}{This paragraph is vertically
+ aligned at the top.}
+\rtpara[valign=middle]{para2}{This paragraph is
+ vertically aligned at the middle.}
+\rtpara[valign=bottom]{para3}{This paragraph is
+ vertically aligned at the bottom.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[valign=top]{para1}{This paragraph is vertically aligned at the top.}
+\rtpara[valign=middle]{para2}{This paragraph is vertically aligned at the middle.}
+\rtpara[valign=bottom]{para3}{This paragraph is vertically aligned at the bottom.}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{1.5in}{16bp*5}\kern4bp
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para2}}\V{\useV{para2}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{1.5in}{16bp*5}\kern4bp
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para3}}\V{\useV{para3}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{1.5in}{16bp*5}\par\medskip
+\end{flushleft}
+The \texttt{valign} key seems to apply to all paragraphs in the rich text form field, as illustrated below.
+\begin{flushleft}
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{skipline}{para2}{skipline}{para3}}\par\smallskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{4in}{16bp*8}\par\smallskip
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para2}{skipline}{para1}{skipline}{para3}}\par\smallskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{4in}{16bp*8}
+\end{flushleft}
+The vertical alignment for the whole rich text field obeys the \texttt{valign} key of the first paragraph.
+
+ \item[\uif{Indents:}] Through the \uif{Indents} region of the \uif{Paragraph} tab, left and right margins may be set,
+ as well as the amount of indent.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\uif{Left:}] \texttt{margleft=\darg{dec}} The value of \darg{dec} is a nonnegative decimal number, it represents
+ the number of points to make the left margin.
+ \item[\uif{Right:}] \texttt{margright=\darg{dec}} The value of \darg{dec} is a nonnegative decimal number, it represents
+ the number of points to make the right margin.
+
+\medskip
+ Below is an example for both \texttt{margleft} and \texttt{margright}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[margleft=10,margright=40,halign=justify
+ ]{para1}{This is the first paragraph, it has
+ a left margin of 10pt and a right margin of
+ 40pt.}
+\rtpara[halign=justify]{para2}{This is the second
+ paragraph. We demonstrate that the left and
+ margins can be applied separately to
+ paragraphs.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[font=10,margleft=10,margright=40,halign=justify]{para1}{This is the first
+paragraph, it has a left margin of 10pt and a right margin of 40pt.}
+\rtpara[font=10,halign=justify]{para2}{This is the second paragraph. We demonstrate that the
+left and margins can be applied separately to paragraphs.}
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{skipline}{para2}}\par\smallskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{4in}{14bp*6}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\medskip
+\item[\uif{First \& By:}] Two key-values: \texttt{indent=\ameta{\upshape{none|first|hanging}}} \& \texttt{indentby=\ameta{dec}}
+ When \texttt{indent} key is set to \texttt{indent=first}, the first line is indented by an amount of \texttt{\ameta{dec}pt}; similarly,
+ if \texttt{indent=hanging}, there is a hang indent on the first line by an amount of \texttt{-\ameta{dec}pt}
+ (the minus sign (\texttt{-}) is automatically applied. The default indent amount it \texttt{12pt}.\smallskip\kern0pt
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{This paragraph is
+ indented by the default amount of 12pt.}
+\rtpara[indent=first,indentby=24]{para2}{In this
+ second paragraph, we indent by 24pt, twice
+ as wide as the default.}
+\rtpara[indent=hanging]{par3}{Here we have a third
+ paragraph, separated from the other two, with
+ the default hanging indentation.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{This paragraph is indented by the default amount of 12pt.}
+\rtpara[indent=first,indentby=24]{para2}{In this second paragraph, we indent by 24pt, twice as wide as the default.}
+\rtpara[indent=hanging]{para3}{Here we have a third paragraph, separated from the other two, with
+the default hanging indentation.}\par\smallskip
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}{skipline}{para3}}\par\smallskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*15/2}\par\smallskip
+\end{flushleft}
+
+ \end{description}
+
+\goodbreak
+ \item[\uif{Spacing:}]
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\uif{Above:}] \texttt{margtop=\ameta{dec}} A value of \ameta{dec} (positive, negative, or zero) adds
+ vertical space \emph{above} the paragraph.\medskip
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[margtop=12]{para1}{We put 12pt of extra
+ space above this paragraph.}
+\rtpara[margtop=24]{para2}{Extra space above this
+ paragraph (24pt).}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[margtop=12]{para1}{We put 12pt of extra space above this paragraph.}
+\rtpara[margtop=24]{para2}{Extra space above this paragraph (24pt).}
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}}\par\medskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*6}\par\smallskip
+\end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\uif{Below:}] \texttt{margbottom=\ameta{dec}} A value of \ameta{dec} (positive, negative, or zero) adds
+ vertical space below the paragraph.\par\medskip
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[valign=bottom,margbottom=12]{para1}{We put
+ \span{font=Courier,style=bold}{valign=bottom},
+ but bring the paragraph up 12pt from there.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\rtpara[valign=bottom,margbottom=12]{para1}{We put \span{font=Courier,style=bold}{valign=bottom}, but bring the
+paragraph up 12pt from there.}\par\medskip
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*6}
+
+\medskip\goodbreak
+ \item[\uif{Line Spacing}] Sets the amount of vertical space between baselines. The key-values are
+\begin{equation*}
+ \texttt{linespacing=\ameta{\upshape{single|oneandhalf|double|exact}}}
+\end{equation*}
+ When \texttt{linespacing=exact}, use
+ \texttt{lineheight=\ameta{dec}} to set the space between baselines.
+\begin{flushleft}
+\rtpara[linespacing=oneandhalf]{para1}{This
+paragraph has line spacing of oneandhalf. We will prattle on to get
+some wraparound to the next line.}
+\rtpara[linespacing=double]{para2}{This paragraph has double spacing. Once again, we'll
+ramble, not prattle, on for several more words.}
+\rtpara[linespacing=exact,lineheight=30]{para3}{Let's see what we get here, with
+linespacing=exact, lineheight=30. Do we get significant separation between sentences?}
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}{para3}}\par\medskip %{skipline}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{\linewidth-2bp}{16bp*12}\par\medskip
+\end{flushleft}
+
+The paragraph declarations for the above rich text field are,
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[linespacing=oneandhalf]{para1}{This
+ paragraph has line spacing of oneandhalf. We
+ will prattle on to get some wraparound to the
+ next line.}
+\rtpara[linespacing=double]{para2}{This paragraph
+ has double spacing. Once again, we'll ramble,
+ not prattle, on for several more words.}
+\rtpara[linespacing=exact,lineheight=30]{para3}
+ {Let's see what we get here, with
+ linespacing=exact, lineheight=30. Do we
+ get significant separation between sentences?}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\medskip\noindent
+The value of \texttt{lineheight}, which gives a `squeezing' effect between lines of the paragraph.
+ \end{description}
+ \end{description}
+\end{description}
+
+\subsubsection{Miscellaneous markup for the \texorpdfstring{\protect\uif{Paragraph}}{Paragraph} classification}
+
+There are several other features that do not fit conveniently anywhere else, so here they are.
+
+\paragraph[Starting a new line using \texorpdfstring{\protect\cs{br}}{\textbackslash{br}}]%
+{Starting a new line using \cs{br}.}\chgCurrLblName{Starting a new line using \protect\cs{br}}\label{para:NewLine}
+The \cs{br} command expands to \texttt{<br />}. It should not be put within
+the second argument of the \cs{span} command. As was the case with \cs{bf},
+\cs{it}, \cs{sub}, and \cs{sup}, do not directly code in \texttt{<br />} for
+you will fail.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rtpara{para1}{Let's begin a sentence,\br then we'll
+ start a new line for no apparent reason.\br\br
+ Let's double down on the new lines shall we?}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{Let's begin a sentence,\br then we'll
+ start a new line for no apparent reason.\br\br Let's
+ double down on the new lines shall we?}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*6}
+\end{quote}
+
+\paragraph[Adding spaces with \texorpdfstring{\cs{spc}}{\textbackslash{spc}}]{Adding
+ spaces with \cs{spc}.}\chgCurrLblName{Adding
+ spaces with \protect\cs{spc}}\label{para:addSPC}
+ As with {\TeX} multiple spaces are ignored. To insert additional
+ `hard' spaces into the data stream, use the \cs{spc} command. (This is a local command that
+ is undefined outside \cs{rtpara}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rtpara{para1}{Way to go!\spc\spc\spc\spc The Coach}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Here we induce four hard spaces.
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{Way to go!{\spc\spc\spc\spc}The Coach}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}%\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp}
+\end{quote}
+
+\paragraph[Using the \texorpdfstring{\texttt{raw}}{raw} key]{Using
+the \texttt{raw} key.}\chgCurrLblName{Using
+the \texttt{raw} key}\label{para:RawKey}
+There is another key, the \texttt{raw} key, that can be used
+within the optional argument of \cs{rtpara} or within the first argument of \cs{span}. Using this key,
+you can pass raw CSS2 markup.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\rtpara{para1}{We test the letter-spacing
+ attribute:\br\br\span{raw=letter-spacing:0.25em;}
+ {We test the letter-spacing attribute.}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{We test the letter-spacing attribute:\br\br\span{raw=letter-spacing:0.25em;}{We test the letter-spacing
+attribute.}}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3.5in}{16bp*6}
+\end{quote}
+The syntax for a CSS2 attribute is `\texttt{\ameta{key}:\ameta{value};}', that is, keys and values are separated
+by a colon (\texttt{:}) and the value is terminated with a semi-colon (\texttt{;}).
+
+It appears that tab stops work as well, these can be specified using the \texttt{raw} key as well. Refer to the
+XFA Specifications~\cite{webpage:XFASpec}.
+
+\paragraph[Special characters]{Special characters.}\chgCurrLblName{Special characters}\label{para:SpecChars}
+ The \pkg{richtext} handles special characters pretty well.
+Before \cs{rtpara} reads its third argument (\ameta{rich-text-paragraph}), a
+number of changes in \cs{catcode}s and redefinitions occur. Within
+\cs{rtpara}, the following characters \emph{do not need to be} escaped:
+\texttt{\$}, \texttt{\#}, and \texttt{\string~} (tilde). The following
+characters \emph{need to be} escaped: \texttt{\cs{<}}, \texttt{\cs{>}},
+\verb|\&|, \verb|\%| (the comment character (\texttt{\%}) retains its
+{\LaTeX} meaning), \verb|\{|, and \verb|\}| (the left and right braces have
+their usual \TeX/LaTeX{} meaning). The single quote (\texttt{'}) and double quote (\texttt{"}) may
+be optionally escaped (to \cs{'} and \cs{"}). Escape them if something goes wrong. Use the
+command \cs{cs\darg{\ameta{text}}} to obtain a literal backslash (`\verb|\|'); for example
+\verb|\cs{LaTeX}|, shown below, expands to `\texttt{\cs{LaTeX}}'.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara{para1}{We \"test\" \'special\' \bf{characters:}
+ \<\>\&\{ #\% in \cs{LaTeX} $x^2_4$ becomes
+ \it{x}\sup{2}\sub{4} \{\}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The above \cs{rtpara} paragraph has two forms the \psf{RV} form and the \psf{V} form; these
+can be seen by using the \cs{useRV} and \cs{useV} commands.
+
+\begingroup\raggedright
+\makeatletter\def\rt@SC{;\penalty0}\makeatother
+\rtpara{para1}{We \"test\" 'special' \bf{characters:} \<\>\&\{ #\% in
+\cs{LaTeX} $x^2_4$ becomes \it{x}\sup{2}\sub{4} \{\}}
+\begin{quote}
+\hspace*{-\leftmargini}\textbf{\cs{useRV\darg{para1}:}} \texttt{\useRV{para1}}
+
+\hspace*{-\leftmargini}\textbf{\cs{useV\darg{para1}:}} \texttt{\useV{para1}}
+\end{quote}
+The resulting rich text form field is seen below:\\[3pt]
+\makeatletter\def\rt@SC{;}\makeatother
+\rtpara{para1}{We \"test\" \'special\' \bf{characters:} \<\>\&\{ #\% in
+\cs{LaTeX} $x^2_4$ becomes \it{x}\sup{2}\sub{4} \{\}}
+\incFldCnt\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*4}
+\par\endgroup
+\medskip\noindent
+That's pretty cool!
+
+\section{Rich text fields}
+
+Up to this point in the manual, the discussion has focused on creating rich
+text strings. They may be fun to create and look at, but usually we want to
+insert them into a text field. The comments here are for \pkg{eforms}
+package, having checked with \pkg{hyperref} to see if there is a \psf{RV}
+key, there is not.
+
+To create a rich text field, use the \cs{textField} command of \pkg{eforms}:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+ \DS{!ameta(defaultstyle)}\RV{!ameta(rich-value)}\V{!ameta(value)}
+]{!ameta(fld-name)}{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Remove \cs{Ff\darg{\cs{FfMultiline}}} if the field is only a single line. We
+discuss the \psf{DS} key (\cs{DS}) key first, followed by the keys \psf{RV}
+and \psf{V} (\cs{RV} and \cs{V}).
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\psf{DS}}{DS} key}
+
+The value of the \psf{DS} key sets the formatting for the text field as a
+whole. Most importantly, use it to set the font, text size, and color.
+There is a built-in default style, defined below:
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\small\string\newcommand\string\useDefaultDS\darg{font-family:Helvetica,sans-serif;}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\newcommand\useDefaultDS{font-family:Helvetica,sans-serif;
+ font-size:12.0pt;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal;
+ text-align:left;color:#000000}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb You may redefine it to suit your purposes, but this is what
+\app{Acrobat}/\app{Adobe Reader} sets as the default style. I would recommend
+\cs{setDefaultStyle} to define your own custom default style. \cs{useDefaultDS} is the reason
+why most all rich text fields in this document use Helvetica at \texttt{12pt}! Use
+\cs{useDefaultDS} as follows, shown in bold font:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,commandchars=!()]
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+ \DS{!textbf(\useDefaultDS)}\RV{!ameta(rich-value)}\V{!ameta(value)}
+]{!ameta(fld-name)}{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\newtopic\noindent To create a custom default style use \cs{setDefaultStyle}.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\setDefaultStyle\darg{\ameta{name}}\darg{\ameta{Font-Para-attrs}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\setDefaultStyle{!ameta(name)}{!ameta(Font-Para-attrs)}
+\useDS{!ameta(name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+Typically, the key-values associated with the \uif{Font} tab, Section~\ref{s:FLtabs}, may be used,
+some key-values are removed, such as \texttt{ul}, \texttt{raise}, and \texttt{url}. When you've defined
+a custom default style using \cs{setDefaultStyle}, insert \cs{useDS\darg{\ameta{name}}} as the value
+of the \psf{DS} key.\incFldCnt
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\rtpara{para1}{The font should be \'Myriad Pro\' at 10pt
+ and the default color of the field is webbrown, a color
+ defined in the web package.}
+\setDefaultStyle{myStyle}{font='Myriad Pro',size=10,
+ color=!htmlWebBrown}
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+ \DS{!textbf(\useDS{myStyle})}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}
+]{rtFld!the!fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*3}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{The font should be \'Myriad Pro\' at 10pt and the
+ default color of the field is webbrown, a color defined in the web package.}
+\setDefaultStyle{myStyle}{font='Myriad Pro',size=10,color=\htmlWebBrown}
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDS{myStyle}}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*3}
+\end{quote}
+Note the use of \cs{useRV} and \cs{useV} in the \psf{RV} and \psf{V} fields.
+These are discussed in the next section.
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\psf{RV}}{RV} and
+\texorpdfstring{\protect\psf{V}}{V} keys}
+
+The techniques to handle multiple paragraph fields are more complex (but not discouragingly so),
+that topic will be taken up after the discussion of single paragraph fields.
+
+\subsubsection{Single paragraph fields}
+
+For a single paragraph field, there is only one \cs{repara} defined prior to the field. This string
+data (both rich and plain) are inserted into the \cs{RV} and \cs{V} keys using \cs{useRV} and \cs{useV}. We repeat the
+previous example, but with the emphasis on \cs{RV} and \cs{V}, and not on \cs{DS}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\rtpara{para1}{The font should be \'Myriad Pro\' at 10pt
+ and the default color of the field is webbrown, a
+ color defined in the web package.}
+\setDefaultStyle{myStyle}{font='Myriad Pro',size=10,
+ color=!htmlWebBrown}
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+ \DS{\useDS{myStyle}}\RV{!textbf(\useRV{para1})}\V{!textbf(\useV{para1})}
+]{rtFld!the!fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*3}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\begin{quote}
+\rtpara{para1}{The font should be \'Myriad Pro\' at 10pt and the
+default color of the field is webbrown, a color defined in the web package.}
+\setDefaultStyle{myStyle}{font='Myriad Pro',size=10,color=\htmlWebBrown}
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDS{myStyle}}\RV{\useRV{para1}}\V{\useV{para1}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{3in}{16bp*3}
+\end{quote}
+We declare our rich paragraph string using \cs{rtpara} and name it
+\texttt{para1}. We insert two data streams, one into the rich text key
+(\cs{RV\darg{useRV\darg{para}}}) and the other into the (plain) text key
+(\cs{V\darg{useV\darg{para}}}).
+
+
+\subsubsection{Multiple paragraph fields}
+
+The strategy is to use several \cs{rtpara} commands to declare several rich
+text paragraph. What is the best way to `paste' these paragraphs together? The method
+developed is to use \cs{setRVVContent} command.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\setRVVContent\darg{\ameta{name}}\darg{ \darg{\ameta{name\SUB{1}}}\darg{\ameta{name\SUB{2}}}...\darg{\ameta{name\SUB{k}}} }}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\setRVVContent{!ameta(name)}{ {!ameta(name!SUB(1))}{!ameta(name!SUB(2))}...{!ameta(name!SUB(k))} }
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{name\SUB{i}} is the name of a rich text paragraph string,
+or is the keyword \texttt{skipline}. The keyword \texttt{skipline} is
+case-sensitive, it must be typed exactly. The role \texttt{skipline} plays is to
+insert a blank line between paragraphs; \texttt{\darg{skipline}} inserts one
+blank line between paragraphs.
+
+Having composed how the strings are to be put together, we need to insert them into
+\psf{RV} and \psf{V}.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\useRVContent\darg{\ameta{name}}}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\useRVContent{!ameta(name)}
+\useVContent{!ameta(name)}
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb where \ameta{name} is the name given in a previous \cs{setRVVContent}
+command. Insert \cs{useRVContent} as the value of the \psf{RV} key, and
+\cs{useVContent} as the value of the \psf{V} key.
+
+We take as an example, the one from Section~\ref{s:CreateRTS}.\incFldCnt
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{Now is the time for
+ \span{style={bold,italic,strikeit},color=ff0000}{J\374rgen}
+ and all good men to come to the aid of \it{their}
+ \bf{country}. Now is the time for \span{style=italic}
+ {all good} women to do the same.}
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para2}{With rich text, we can format the
+ text within the text field. As a reader of this rich text
+ field, you can edit the contents of the box, feel free to
+ do so.}
+\rtpara[halign=right]{para3}{D. P. Story
+ \span{url=http://www.acrotex.net}{AcroTeX.Net}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Now set the content with \cs{setRVVContent}, naming it \texttt{myContent}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}{skipline}{para3}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Having done all that, we create our rich text field:
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{center}
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+ \DS{\useDefaultDS}
+ !textbf(\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}})
+ !textbf(\V{\useVContent{myContent}})
+]{rtFld!the!fldCnt}{4in}{10\baselineskip}
+\end{center}
+\end{Verbatim}
+where, the \cs{RV} and \cs{V} keys are highlighted in bold for your viewing pleasure.
+The rich text field the result of these declarations.
+
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para1}{Now is the time for
+\span{style={bold,italic,strikeit},color=ff0000}{J\374rgen} and
+all good men to come to the aid of \it{their} \bf{country}. Now
+is the time for \span{style=italic}{all good} women to do the same.}
+\rtpara[indent=first]{para2}{With rich text, we can format the text within
+the text field. As a reader of this rich text field, you can edit the
+contents of the box, feel free to do so.}
+\rtpara[halign=right]{para3}{D. P. Story \span{url=http://www.acrotex.net}{AcroTeX.Net}}
+
+\setRVVContent{myContent}{{para1}{para2}{skipline}{para3}}
+
+\begin{center}
+%\previewtrue
+\incFldCnt
+\textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}%\DS{\useDS{myDS}}%
+\RV{\useRVContent{myContent}}\V{\useVContent{myContent}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{4in}{10\baselineskip}
+\end{center}
+
+The argument of \cs{setRVVContent} is pretty robust. In making our declarations, we can type:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\setRVVContent{myContent}
+{
+ {para1}
+ {para2}
+ {skipline}
+ {skipline}
+ {para3}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Note that I've added a \texttt{skipline} so that are two blank lines after the second paragraph
+and before the third paragraph.
+
+\bigskip\noindent
+That's about it! Now, back to my retirement. \dps \space (See next page)
+
+\newpage
+
+Did I say that you can write captions to figures using rich text?
+
+\rtpara[valign=bottom,margbottom=12,margleft=12,margright=12]{farewell}{\bf{Thank you} for reviewing the
+\span{font=Courier}{richtext} package, I hope you will enjoy exploring
+it. Did I say that \span{url=www.acrotex.net,style=bold}{AcroTeX Rocks!}\spc\spc\spc\spc dps}
+
+\begin{center}\incFldCnt
+\makebox[\dpswebW]{\makebox[0pt][l]{\textField[\BC{}\BG{}\autoCenter{n}\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}
+\DS{\useDefaultDS}
+\RV{\useRV{farewell}}\V{\useV{farewell}}]{rtFld\the\fldCnt}{\dpswebW}{\dpswebH}}%
+ \includegraphics{dpsweb}}
+\end{center}
+
+\newpage
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[1]}\label{references}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}References}
+%\backrefparscanfalse
+\let\backrefprint\relax
+\def\srtln{\vskip-\baselineskip\vskip-\parsep}
+\def\lngln{\vskip-\parsep}
+
+\bibitem{webpage:XFASpec}\hypertarget{references}{}%
+Adobe XML Forms Architecture (XFA) Specification, Version 3.3, Adobe Systems, Inc.,
+Jan.\ 2012\backrefprint
+ \lngln\hfill{\small\url{partners.adobe.com/public/developer/xml/index_arch.html}}
+
+\bibitem{webpage:CSS2}
+Cascading Style Sheets (CSS 2.2) Specification, Editors: Bert Bos \textsl{et al.},
+World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), June 2011
+ \lngln\hfill{\small\url{https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS2/}}
+
+\bibitem{tech:AcroJS}
+ JavaScript for Acrobat API Reference,
+ Adobe Systems, Inc., May 2015
+ \lngln\hfill{\small\url{adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/documentation.html}}
+
+\bibitem{book:pdfspec}
+ PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, Version 1.7, Adobe Systems, Inc., 2006
+ \lngln\hfill{\small\url{adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference_archive.html}}
+
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
+
+% Adobe XML Forms Architecture (XFA) Specification, version 3.3, Jan. 2012,
+% http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/xml/index_arch.html
+
+\end{document}
+
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\useNoHints\quad\string\useHints}%
+\begin{dCmd}[commandchars=!()]{\bxSize}
+\useNoHints!quad\useHints
+\end{dCmd}
+\eVerb The commands are used between \env{card} environments to change the
+default usage of hints. When hints are \emph{not provided}, a simple message
+defined by the command \cs{noHintProvided} (see \autopageref{noHintProvided}) appears on the hint page.
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..51bb4118
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,775 @@
+%\iffalse
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% richtext package, %%
+%% Copyright (C) 2016 D. P. Story %%
+%% dpstory@uakron.edu %%
+%% %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version. %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{richtext}
+%<package> [2016/10/03 v1.0c richtext: create rich text strings (dps)]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex=false]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{calc}
+\let\uif\textsf\let\app\textsf
+\let\pkg\textsf\let\env\texttt
+\def\psf#1{\textsf{\textbf{#1}}}
+%\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}
+\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\RecordChanges
+\InputIfFileExists{aebdocfmt.def}{\PackageInfo{richtext}{Inputting aebdocfmt.def}}
+ {\def\IndexOpt{\DescribeMacro}\def\IndexKey{\DescribeMacro}\let\setupFullwidth\relax
+ \PackageInfo{richtext}{aebdocfmt.def cannot be found}}
+\begin{document}
+\def\CMD#1{\textbackslash#1}
+ \GetFileInfo{richtext.sty}
+ \title{\textsf{richtext}: Creating Rich Text Strings}
+ \author{D. P. Story\\
+ Email: \texttt{dpstory@acrotex.net}}
+ \date{processed \today}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \let\Email\texttt
+ \renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+ \let\efill\relax
+ \begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}
+ \value{GlossaryColumns}=1
+ \DocInput{richtext.dtx}
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{\newpage\setupFullwidth\par\PrintIndex}{\paragraph*{Index} The index goes here.\\Execute
+ \texttt{makeindex -s gind.ist -o richtext.ind richtext.idx} on the command line and recompile
+ \texttt{richtext.dtx}.}
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{\PrintChanges}{\paragraph*{Change History} The list of changes goes here.\\Execute
+ \texttt{makeindex -s gglo.ist -o richtext.gls richtext.glo} on the command line and recompile
+ \texttt{richtext.dtx}.}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \MakeShortVerb{|}
+% \InputIfFileExists{aebdonotindex.def}{\PackageInfo{web}{Inputting aebdonotindex.def}}
+% {\PackageInfo{web}{cannot find aebdonotindex.def}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+\RequirePackage{ifxetex}[2006/08/21]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This package supports the creation of \emph{rich text strings} (a type of pdf string). A
+% rich text string is used in a rich text field as the value of the PDF key \psf{RV}. We also support
+% the \psf{DS} key which determines the default style.
+%
+% From the PDF Reference (PDF~1.7), page 1310, ``these rich text strings are fully-formed XML documents that conform to the rich
+% text conventions specified for the XML Forms Architecture (XFA) specification,
+% which is itself a subset of the XHTML 1.0 specification, augmented with a
+% restricted set of CSS2 style attributes.''
+%
+% A rich text field may be created using the \pkg{eforms} package, like so
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \textField[\Ff{\FfRichText}\Ff{\FfMultiline}<other-options>
+% \DS{<defaultstyle>}\RV{<richvalue>}\V{<value>}
+% ]{<fldname>}{<width>}{<height>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This package provides commands and methods for `conveniently' create values
+% \texttt{<richvalue>} and \texttt{<defaultstyle>} for \psf{RV} and
+% \psf{DS}; additionally, the value \texttt{<value>} of the \psf{V} key is the `plain' text
+% value of the field; that is the text with all the formatting stripped out.
+%
+%\section{Preliminaries}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifrt@formfield \rt@formfieldtrue
+\newif\ifrt@needsbody\rt@needsbodyfalse
+\@ifpackageloaded{eforms}%
+ {\ifxetex\let\@eqV\@eqnuV\fi}{\rt@needsbodytrue}
+\providecommand\eq@RV@Body{<?xml version="1.0"?><body %
+ xfa:APIVersion="Acroform:2.7.0.0" %
+ xfa:contentType="text/html" %
+ xfa:spec="2.1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" %
+ xmlns:xfa="http://www.xfa.org/schema/xfa-data/1.0/">}
+\providecommand\eq@RV@endBody{</body>}
+\def\rt@bBody{\ifrt@needsbody\eq@RV@Body\fi}
+\def\rt@eBody{\ifrt@needsbody\eq@RV@endBody\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\section{Documentation for the \texorpdfstring{\protect\psf{RV}}{RV} key}
+%
+%We follow the \app{Acrobat} user interface.
+%There two tabs of interest \uif{Font} and \uif{paragraph}.
+%
+%\begin{description}
+%\item[Font]\leavevmode
+%\begin{description}
+% \item[\uif{Text}]\leavevmode
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item\uif{Font:} \texttt{<font-name>}
+% \item\uif{Size:} 10
+% \item\uif{Baseline Shift:} 0 points
+% \item\uif{Underline:} No Underline, Underline, Double Underline, Word Underline, Word Double Underline
+% \item\uif{Style:} Bold, Italic, Strike-through
+% \item\uif{Color:} RGB
+% \end{itemize}
+%\end{description}
+%\item[Paragraph]\leavevmode
+%\begin{description}
+% \item[\uif{Alignment}]\leavevmode
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Horizontal: left, center, right, justify
+% \item Vertical: top, middle, bottom
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item[\uif{Indents}]\leavevmode
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \uif{Left:} 0 points
+% \item \uif{Right:} 0 points
+% \item \uif{First:} None, First Line, Hanging
+% \item \uif{By:} 0 points
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item[\uif{Spacing}]\leavevmode
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \uif{Above:} 0 points
+% \item \uif{Below:} 0 points
+% \item \uif{Line Spacing:} Single, 1.5 Lines, Double Lines, Exactly (At: 0 points)
+% \end{itemize}
+%\end{description}
+%\item[Link] \uif{Enter a URL for this link}
+%\item[On main Properties Menu bar:] Also supported are subscript (\texttt{<sub>\penalty0</sub>}) and superscript
+%(\texttt{<sup>\penalty0</sup>})\leavevmode
+%\end{description}
+% \subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\uif{Font}}{Font}
+% and \texorpdfstring{\protect\uif{Link}}{Link} tabs}
+% We support the attributes seen in the above list. We further
+% support subscripts, superscript, and links in this section.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifrtfontstyle\rtfontstylefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The keys of the \texttt{rtFont} key-value family. Supported keys are \texttt{font}, \texttt{size}, \texttt{raise}, \texttt{ulstyle},
+% \texttt{color}, \texttt{url}, and \texttt{style}. Superscripts and subscripts are handled differently.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \IndexKey{font}\texttt{font} key's value is a font name, if the name contains a space, it should be enclosed
+% in single quotes: \texttt{font=Arial} or \texttt{font='Myriad Pro'}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{font}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@font\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue
+ \def\rf@font{font-family:#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The value of \IndexKey{size}\texttt{size} is the size of the font, as measured in points
+% \texttt{font=12pt}, note the use of the entity `\texttt{pt}'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{size}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@size\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue\def\rf@size@num{#1}%
+ \def\rf@size@pt{#1pt}\def\rf@size{font-size:#1pt}\fi}
+\def\rf@size@num{12}\def\rf@size@pt{12pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The key \IndexOpt{raise}\texttt{raise} corresponds to the user interface item \uif{Baseline Shift},
+% measured in points, for example, \texttt{raise=6pt}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{raise}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@raise\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue
+ \def\rf@raise{vertical-align:#1pt}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The key \IndexOpt{ulstyle}\texttt{ulstyle} supplies an underline attribute, for example,
+% \texttt{ul=word} underlines each word in the span.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{rtFont}{ulstyle}[\val\nr]%
+ {none,ul,2ul,wul,2wul}[none]{%
+ \ifcase\nr\relax
+ \def\rf@ul{none}\or
+ \def\rf@ul{underline}\or
+ \def\rf@ul{double}\or
+ \def\rf@ul{word}\or
+ \def\rf@ul{double word}\fi
+ \rtfontstyletrue
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The key \IndexOpt{color}\texttt{color} supplies a color attribute for the text in the span.
+% There are two formats: \texttt{rrggbb} (hex) and \texttt{rgb(r,g,b)} (0-255). For example,
+% \texttt{color=ff0000} or \texttt{color=rgb(255,0,0)} both color the text red.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@r{r}\let\rt@One=1 \let\rt@Zero=0
+\def\rt@parseColor#1(#2\@nil{\def\rt@argi{#2}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+\let\rt@rgbdec\rt@Zero\else\let\rt@rgbdec\rt@One\fi}
+\def\rt@gobbletonil#1\@nil{}
+\bgroup\@makeother\#\@makeother\&%
+\gdef\rt@hashtag{#}\gdef\rt@amp{&}\egroup
+\define@key{rtFont}{color}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@color\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue
+ \rt@parseColor#1(\@nil
+ \if\rt@rgbdec\rt@One
+ \def\rf@color{color:#1}\else
+ \def\rf@color{color:\rt@hashtag#1}\fi
+\fi}
+\let\rf@color\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The key \IndexOpt{url}\texttt{url} enable the rich text string to contain
+% a URL hypertext link.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{url}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rt@url\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue\def\rt@url{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{rtFontStyle} family provides keys \IndexOpt{bold}\texttt{bold},
+% \IndexOpt{italic}\texttt{italic} and \IndexOpt{strikeit}\texttt{strikeit}.
+% They are possible values of the \texttt{style} key, define below. The \texttt{style} key
+% can take on one or several values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{rtFontStyle}{bold}[\val\nr]{normal,bold}[bold]%
+ {\edef\rfS@bold{\val}}{}
+\define@choicekey+{rtFontStyle}{italic}[\val\nr]{normal,italic}[italic]%
+ {\edef\rfS@italic{\val}}{}
+\define@key{rtFontStyle}{strikeit}[]{\def\rfS@strikeit{line-through}}
+\let\rfS@normal\@empty\let\rfS@bold\@empty
+\let\rfS@italic\@empty\let\rfS@strikeit\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Continuing the \texttt{rtFont} family, the \IndexOpt{style}\texttt{style} can take on
+% several values: The key-value of \texttt{style=\{bold,italic,strikeit\}} sets the text to bold, italic,
+% and strike out. Multiple attributes must be enclosed in parentheses, as shown above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{style}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@style\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue\def\rf@style{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We provide a \IndexKey{raw}\texttt{raw} experimental key. The value of this key is passed through; it must
+% be of the proper syntax.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtFont}{raw}[]{\def\rt@argi{#1}\ifx\rt@argi\@empty
+ \let\rf@raw\@empty\else\rtfontstyletrue\def\rf@raw{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \DescribeMacro{\resetRtFontKeys} is an internal command to reset all keys to their default values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\resetRtFontKeys{% rtFont family
+ \let\rf@font\@empty\let\rf@size\@empty
+ \let\rf@raise\@empty\let\rf@ul\@empty
+ \let\rf@color\@empty\let\rf@style\@empty\let\rt@url\@empty
+ \let\rf@raw\@empty
+ % rtFontStyle family
+ \let\rfS@normal\@empty\let\rfS@bold\@empty
+ \let\rfS@italic\@empty\let\rfS@strikeit\@empty
+ \rtfontstylefalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now give all keys their default values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\resetRtFontKeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As we interpret the rich text string, we must save it properly formatted in both
+% rich and plain format. These are macro for accumulating the strings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@AddToRichText}{\g@addto@macro\rt@RichText}
+\newcommand{\@AddToPlainText}{\g@addto@macro\rt@PlainText}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some utility commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@excl{!}
+\def\rt@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\useRV}
+% The \cs{useRV} command expands to the rich string defined by \cs{rtpara} and is used as the value
+% of the \psf{RV} key.
+% \begin{macro}{\useV}
+% The \cs{useV} command expands to the plain string defined by \cs{rtpara} and is used as the value
+% of the \psf{V} key.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useRV}[1]{\@nameuse{#1-ri}}
+\newcommand{\useV}[1]{\@nameuse{#1-pl}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\rvorvstring}\cmd{rvorvstring} is similar to \cs{texorpdfstring}, the first argument
+% is a rich string while the second is a plain string. The two must match correctly, or the PDF reader
+% may not display correctly; on error the reader displays the plain text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@rvstring \@rvstringfalse
+\def\rvorvstring{\if@rvstring
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{Subscripts (\cs{sub}\DescribeMacro{\sub}) and superscripts (\cs{sup}\DescribeMacro{\sup})} There are two versions, one for rich text expansion
+% and one for plain text expansion. Within \cs{rtpara} these two are \cs{let} to \cs{sub} and \cs{sup}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@sub#1{\rvorvstring{<sub>#1</sub>}{#1}}
+\def\rt@sup#1{\rvorvstring{<sup>#1</sup>}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Other supported markup: \cs{br}\DescribeMacro{\br}, \cs{bf}\DescribeMacro{\bf}, and
+% \cs{it}\DescribeMacro{it}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@br{\rvorvstring{<br />}{\string\r}}
+\def\rt@bf#1{\rvorvstring{<b>#1</b>}{#1}}
+\def\rt@it#1{\rvorvstring{<i>#1</i>}{#1}}
+\def\rt@spc{\rvorvstring{<span style="xfa-spacerun:yes">\rt@amp
+ \rt@hashtag160\rt@SC</span>}{ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some convenience commands
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@SC{;}\def\rt@CN{:}\def\rt@fs{font-style}\def\rt@fw{font-weight}
+\def\rt@td{text-decoration}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \paragraph*{The \cs{span} command} There are two versions of the \cs{span} command, these
+% are \cs{rt@remove@span} for plain text and \cs{rt@span} for rich text strings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@remove@span#1#2{#2}
+%\let\rt@remove@span\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\rt@span}
+% This is the internal \cs{span} command, it is \cs{let}\cs{span}\cs{rt@span}. Of course
+% \cs{span} is a {\TeX} primitive, so we must be careful not to overwrite it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@StyleAttr{\ifx\rf@font\@empty\else\rf@font\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@size\@empty\else\rf@size\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifrt@formfield\ifx\rf@raise\@empty\else\rf@raise\rt@SC\fi\fi
+ \ifx\rf@ul\@empty\ifx\rfS@strikeit\@empty\else
+ \rt@td\rt@CN\rfS@strikeit\rt@SC\fi
+ \else\rt@td\rt@CN\rf@ul\ifx\rfS@strikeit\@empty\else\space
+ \rfS@strikeit\fi\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rfS@bold\@empty\else\rt@fw\rt@CN\rfS@bold\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rfS@italic\@empty\else\rt@fs\rt@CN\rfS@italic\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@color\@empty\else\rf@color\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@raw\@empty\else\rf@raw\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \DescribeMacro{\span}\cs{span} is let to \cs{rt@span} within the \cs{rtpara} command.
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2016/10/03}{Added \string\cs{rt@afterFont} to allow access by \string\pkg{annot\_pro}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\rt@afterFont\relax
+\newcommand\rt@span[2]{\resetRtFontKeys
+ \edef\x{\noexpand\setkeys{rtFont}{#1}}\x\rt@afterFont
+ \edef\x{\noexpand\setkeys{rtFontStyle}{\rf@style}}\x
+ \edef\rt@Style@ttr{\rt@StyleAttr}%
+ \ifx\rt@url\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are processing a regular \cs{span}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rt@StyleAttr\@empty\def\x{#2}\else
+ \edef\x{<span\ifrtfontstyle\space
+ style="\rt@Style@ttr"\fi>#2</span>}\fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are processing a \cs{span} with the \texttt{url} key set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rt@StyleAttr\@empty\edef\x{<a href="\rt@url">#2</a>}\else
+ \edef\x{<a href="\rt@url"
+ \ifrtfontstyle style="\rt@Style@ttr">#2</a>\fi}\fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\uif{Paragraph}}{Paragraph} tab}
+% We now come to the \cs{rtpara} command, which sets the attributes of the \uif{Paragraph}
+% tab.
+% \begin{macro}{\rtpara}
+% This is how you define a rich text string, through the use of \cs{rtpara}. The command
+% takes three options: (1) The optional first takes key-values just defined in the \texttt{rtFont}
+% and the \texttt{rtPara} families.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% halign: text-align:left|center|right|justify
+% valign: text-valign:top|middle|bottom
+% top is same as no text-valign attribute (vertical-align)
+% Indents:
+% Left: margin-left:10pt;
+% Right: margin-right:10pt
+% First: text-indent: 12pt (Indent)
+% text-indent:-12pt; (Hanging)
+% None
+% Spacing > Line Spacing Line: height:18pt
+% Above margin-top:11pt; Below margin-bottom:11pt;
+% applies to all text in field, not individual paragraphs
+% line-height: <num>pt
+% Single Space: line-height:\rt@size
+% 1.5 Lines : line-height: 1.8*max(\rt@size)
+% Double : line-height: 2.4*max(\rt@size)
+% Exact : line-height: <num>pt
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\paragraph*{Alignment}
+% The \IndexKey{halign}\texttt{halign} key effects the horizontal alignment of a paragraph, choices
+% are \texttt{left}, \texttt{center}, \texttt{right}, and \texttt{justify}. The default is \texttt{left}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{rtPara}{halign}[\val\nr]%
+ {left,center,right,justify}[left]{%
+ \ifcase\nr\relax
+ \def\rt@halign{text-align:left}\or
+ \def\rt@halign{text-align:center}\or
+ \def\rt@halign{text-align:right}\or
+ \def\rt@halign{text-align:justify}\fi
+ \rtfontstyletrue
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \IndexKey{valign}\texttt{valign} seems to effect all paragraphs in the rich text field. Its value
+% determines the vertical placement of the paragraphs: \texttt{top}, \texttt{middle}, and \texttt{bottom}.
+% The default is \texttt{top}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{rtPara}{valign}[\val\nr]{top,middle,bottom}[top]{%
+ \ifcase\nr\relax
+ \def\rt@valign{text-valign:top}\or
+ \def\rt@valign{text-valign:middle}\or
+ \def\rt@valign{text-valign:bottom}\fi
+ \rtfontstyletrue
+}{}
+\let\rt@halign\@empty\let\rt@valign\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\paragraph*{Indents}
+% With the \IndexKey{margleft}\texttt{margleft} and \IndexKey{margright}\texttt{margright}
+% you set the left and right margins of the effected paragraph. The default is \texttt{0pt}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtPara}{margleft}{\def\rt@margleft{margin-left:#1pt}}
+\define@key{rtPara}{margright}{\def\rt@margright{margin-right:#1pt}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \IndexKey{indent}\texttt{indent} key sets the amount of indent of a paragraph, values
+% are \texttt{none}, \texttt{first}, and \texttt{hanging}. The amount of indent is determined
+% by the key \IndexKey{indentby}\texttt{indentby}, which is set to \texttt{12pt} by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey+{rtPara}{indent}[\val\nr]{none,first,hanging}[none]{%
+ \edef\rt@indenttype{\nr}%
+}{}
+\define@key{rtPara}{indentby}[12]{\def\rt@indentby{#1pt}}
+\let\rt@margleft\@empty\let\rt@margright\@empty
+\def\rt@indenttype{0}\def\rt@indentby{12pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\paragraph*{Spacing}
+% With the \IndexKey{margtop}\texttt{margtop} and \IndexKey{margbottom}\texttt{margbottom}
+% you set the space above and below a paragraph. The default is \texttt{0pt}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtPara}{margtop}[0]{\def\rt@margtop{#1pt}}
+\define@key{rtPara}{margbottom}[0]{\def\rt@margbottom{#1pt}}
+\def\rt@margtop{0pt}\def\rt@margbottom{0pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \IndexKey{linespacing}\texttt{linespacing} key the spacing
+% lines. The default is \texttt{0pt}. Choices are \texttt{single} (spacing),
+% \texttt{oneandhalf} (spacing), \texttt{double} (spacing), and \texttt{exact} (spacing).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey{rtPara}{linespacing}[\val\nr]%
+ {single,oneandhalf,double,exact}[single]{%line-height
+ \edef\rt@linespacingtype{\nr}%
+ \ifcase\nr
+ \let\rt@linesp\@empty\or
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{1.8pt*\rf@size@num}%
+ \edef\rt@linesp{\the\@tempdima}\or
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{2.4pt*\rf@size@num}%
+ \edef\rt@linesp{\the\@tempdima}\or
+ \def\rt@linesp{\rf@size@pt}\fi
+}{}
+\let\rt@linesp\@empty\def\rt@linespacingtype{0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \IndexKey{lineheight}\texttt{lineheight} key
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{rtPara}{lineheight}[]{\def\rt@lineheight{#1pt}}
+\let\rt@lineheight\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% More convenience definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtp@ti{text-indent}\def\rtp@mt{margin-top}
+\def\rtp@mb{margin-bottom}\def\rtp@lh{line-height}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We put the parameters all together.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@ParaAttr{%
+% Alignment
+ \ifx\rt@halign\@empty\else\rt@halign\rt@SC\fi
+\ifrt@formfield
+ \ifx\rt@valign\@empty\else\rt@valign\rt@SC\fi
+% Indents
+ \ifx\rt@margleft\@empty\else\rt@margleft\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rt@margright\@empty\else\rt@margright\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifcase\rt@indenttype\space\or
+ \rtp@ti\rt@CN\rt@indentby\rt@SC\or
+ \rtp@ti\rt@CN-\rt@indentby\rt@SC\fi
+% Spacing
+ \rtp@mt\rt@CN\rt@margtop\rt@SC\rtp@mb\rt@CN\rt@margbottom\rt@SC
+ \ifx\rt@linesp\@empty\else
+ \if\rt@linespacingtype3%
+ \ifx\rt@lineheight\@empty
+ \rtp@lh\rt@CN\rt@linesp\rt@SC
+ \else
+ \rtp@lh\rt@CN\rt@lineheight\rt@SC
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \rtp@lh\rt@CN\rt@linesp\rt@SC
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\@=0 @catcode`@\=12
+@gdef@rtbs{\}
+@endgroup
+\def\rt@cs#1{\rvorvstring{\rtbs\rtbs#1}{\string\134#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \DescribeMacro{\rtpara}\cmd{rtpara} takes three arguments. The first optional argument is key-value pairs
+% from the \texttt{rtFont} and \texttt{rtPara} families. The second is a name this rich string. The third is the
+% rich string itself, with supported markup.
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2016/10/03}{Added \string\cs{rt@afterParaFont} to allow access by \string\pkg{annot\_pro}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\rt@afterParaFont\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2016/10/03}{Added \string\cs{rt@dir}}
+% (2016/10/03) Added the \texttt{dir} HTML attribute, default is \texttt{"ltr"}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@dir{ dir="ltr"}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\rtpara[2][]{\begingroup
+ \setkeys{rtPara,rtFont}{#1}\rt@afterParaFont
+ \edef\rt@Para@ttr{\rt@ParaAttr\rt@StyleAttr}%
+ \global\let\rt@RichText\@empty
+ \global\let\rt@PlainText\@empty
+ \def\rt@ctrlName{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Before taking the next parameter, we'll make some special definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\{{\string\{}\def\}{\string\}}%
+ \def\1{\string\1}\def\2{\string\2}\def\3{\string\3}%
+ \@makeother\$\@makeother\#\@makeother\^\@makeother\_\@makeother\~%
+ \@makeother\&\def\&{\rvorvstring{\string&amp;}{\string&}}% req
+ \@makeother\<\def\<{\rvorvstring{\string&lt;}{\string<}}% req
+ \@makeother\>\def\>{\rvorvstring{\string&gt;}{\string>}}%
+ \@makeother\'\def\'{\rvorvstring{\string&apos;}{\string'}}%
+ \@makeother\"\def\"{\rvorvstring{\string&quot;}{\string"}}%
+ \let\cs\rt@cs
+ \rtpara@cont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{rtpara} continues with \cs{rtpara@cont}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtpara@cont#1{%
+ \let\sup\rt@sup\let\sub\rt@sub
+ \let\br\rt@br\let\bf\rt@bf\let\it\rt@it
+ \let\spc\rt@spc
+ \let\span\rt@remove@span
+ \@rvstringfalse
+ \edef\x{#1}\expandafter\@AddToPlainText\expandafter{\x}%
+ \let\span\relax
+ \@rvstringtrue
+ \rtpara@i#1\span!;\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Step 1: \cs{rtpara} comes here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtpara@i#1\span#2;{\def\argii{#2}%
+ \g@addto@macro\rt@RichText{#1}%
+ \ifx\argii\rt@excl
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\rt@ctrlName-ri}%
+ {%
+ <p\rt@dir\ifx\rt@Para@ttr\@empty\else\space
+ style="\rt@Para@ttr"\fi>\rt@RichText</p>%
+ }%
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\rt@ctrlName-pl}{\rt@PlainText}%
+ \let\rt@next\relax
+ \else
+ \def\rt@next{\rtpara@ii#2;}%
+ \fi
+\rt@next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Step 2: \cs{rtpara@i} comes here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtpara@ii#1#2#3;{\def\argii{#2}%
+ \ifx\argii\rt@excl
+ \let\rt@next\relax
+ \else
+ \let\span\rt@span
+ \let\br\rt@br\let\bf\rt@bf\let\it\rt@it
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have encountered \cs{span\{<argi>\}\{<argii>\}} and we expand it appropriately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@rvstringtrue
+ \span{#1}{#2}\edef\rt@tmp{\noexpand\g@addto@macro
+ \noexpand\rt@RichText{\x}}\rt@tmp
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\rt@ctrlName-ri}%
+ {%
+ <p\rt@dir\ifx\rt@Para@ttr\@empty\else\space
+ style="\rt@Para@ttr"\fi>\rt@RichText</p>%
+ }%
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\rt@ctrlName-pl}{\rt@PlainText}%
+ \let\span\relax
+ \def\rt@next{\rtpara@i#3;}%
+ \fi\rt@next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% There is a special definition for \IndexKey{par}\texttt{par} and
+% \IndexKey{skipline}\texttt{skipline}, these should be used between paragraphs to add
+% a blank line between paragraphs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\rt@csarg\def{par-ri}{}\rt@csarg\def{par-pl}{\string\r}
+\rt@csarg\def{skipline-ri}%
+ {<p><span style="xfa-spacerun:yes">\rt@amp
+ \rt@hashtag160;</span></p>}
+\rt@csarg\def{skipline-pl}{\string\r\space}
+\def\rt@skipline{skipline}
+\rt@csarg\def{br-ri}{}\rt@csarg\def{br-pl}{\string\r}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \section{Documentation for the \texorpdfstring{\psf{DS}}{DS} key}
+% The \psf{DS} key sets the default style. According to the JavaScript API for Acrobat reference,
+% the default style supports alignment, textFont, (font family, font style, font weight), textColor,
+% and textSize
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% /DS(font: Helvetica,sans-serif 12.0pt;text-align:left;color:#000000)
+% f=this.getField("RichText")
+% style=f.defaultStyle;
+% style.fontFamily;
+% style.fontStyle;
+% style.fontWeight;
+% style.textFont;
+% style.alignment;
+% style.textColor;
+% style.textSize;
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@DSAttr{\ifx\rf@font\@empty\else\rf@font\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@size\@empty\else\rf@size\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@raise\@empty\else\rf@raise\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@ul\@empty\ifx\rfS@strikeit\@empty\else
+ \rt@td\rt@CN\rfS@strikeit\rt@SC\fi
+ \else\rt@td\rt@CN\rf@ul\ifx\rfS@strikeit\@empty\else\space
+ \rfS@strikeit\fi\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rfS@bold\@empty\else\rt@fw\rt@CN\rfS@bold\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rfS@italic\@empty\else\rt@fs\rt@CN\rfS@italic\rt@SC\fi
+ \ifx\rf@color\@empty\else\rf@color\rt@SC\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\useDefaultDS}
+% A fixed definition for default \psf{DS}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\useDefaultDS{font-family:Helvetica,sans-serif;%
+ font-size:12.0pt;font-style:normal;font-weight:normal;%
+ text-align:left;color:\rt@hashtag000000}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\setDefaultStyle}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \setDefaultStyle{myDS}{font=Arial,...,color=#ff0000}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setDefaultStyle}[2]{\begingroup
+ \edef\x{\noexpand\setkeys{rtFont}{#2}}\x
+ \edef\x{\noexpand\setkeys{rtFontStyle}{\rf@style}}\x
+ \ifx\rf@ul\@empty\else
+ \let\rt@ul\@empty\PackageWarning{richtext}{%
+ The ul key is not supported within\MessageBreak
+ \string\setDefaultStyle. Ignoring it}\fi
+ \ifx\rf@raise\@empty\else
+ \let\rt@raise\@empty\PackageWarning{richtext}{%
+ The raise key is not supported within\MessageBreak
+ \string\setDefaultStyle. Ignoring it}\fi
+ \ifx\rt@url\@empty\else\let\rf@url\@empty
+ \PackageWarning{richtext}{%
+ The url key is not supported within\MessageBreak
+ \string\setDefaultStyle. Ignoring it}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Fill in any missing essential attributes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rf@font\@empty
+ \def\rf@font{font-family:Helvetica,sans-serif}\fi
+ \ifx\rf@size\@empty\def\rf@size{font-size:\rf@size@pt}\fi
+ \ifx\rf@color\@empty\def\rf@color{color:\rt@hashtag000000}\fi
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{#1-DS}{\rt@DSAttr}%
+\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\useDS}
+% \verb!\useDS{<name>}!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\useDS}[1]{\@nameuse{#1-DS}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \section{Passing the rich content to \texorpdfstring{\psf{RV}}{RV}
+% and \texorpdfstring{\psf{V}}{V}}
+% \begin{macro}{\setRVVContent}
+% |\setRVVContent{{name_1}{name_1}...{name_k}}| or |\setRVVContent{name}|
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2016/09/30}{Allow \string\cs{setRVVContent} to have only one argument.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifrt@firsttok \rt@firsttoktrue
+\newif\ifrt@itsskipline \rt@itsskiplinefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd{\rt@addtoRVV} is a convenience internal command to add the name \texttt{\#1}
+% both to \cs{toks0}, which holds the \psf{RV} string, and to \cs{toks2}, which holds the \psf{V} string.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@addtoRVV#1{%
+ \toks4={\useRV{#1}}\edef\rt@tmpRV{\the\toks0\the\toks4}%
+ \toks4={\useV{#1}}\edef\rt@tmpV{\the\toks2\the\toks4}%
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\rt@tmpRV}\toks2=\expandafter{\rt@tmpV}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We begin \cmd{\setRVVContent}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rt@testifbgroup{\@ifnextchar\bgroup
+ {\let\rt@nultiargs=1\rt@gobbletonil}
+ {\let\rt@nultiargs=0\rt@gobbletonil}}
+\newcommand{\setRVVContent}[2]{\begingroup
+ \rt@firsttoktrue \rt@itsskiplinefalse
+ \rt@testifbgroup#2\@nil
+ \def\contName{#1}\toks0={}\toks2={}\toks4={}%
+ \if\rt@nultiargs1\def\rt@next{\setRVVContent@i#2;}\else
+ \def\rt@next{\setRVVContent@i{#2};}\fi\rt@next}
+\def\setRVVContent@i#1{\def\rt@argi{#1}%
+ \ifx\rt@argi\rt@SC
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a semi-colon (\cs{rt@SC}), we are finished. Make the definitions
+% for \psf{RV} and \psf{V}, and exit.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\contName-vcont}{\the\toks0}%
+ \rt@csarg\xdef{\contName-pcont}{\the\toks2}%
+ \let\rt@next\endgroup
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% See if the current argument has been declared earlier by \cs{rtpara}.
+% If not, we issue a warning and ignore it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1-ri\endcsname\relax
+ \PackageWarning{richtext}
+ {The name '#1' is not declared,\MessageBreak
+ will ignore it. Check the spelling}%
+ \def\rt@next{\setRVVContent@i}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to automatically induce \texttt{par} between non-\texttt{lineskip}
+% tokens. The automatic \texttt{par} goes in prior to the token, so we first
+% skip the first token.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifrt@firsttok\rt@firsttokfalse\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not the first token, see if it is a \texttt{skipline}, if yes, register it
+% as a skip line for the next token.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\rt@argi\rt@skipline
+ \rt@itsskiplinetrue
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the previous token was a \texttt{skipline}, we don't induce a \texttt{par}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifrt@itsskipline
+ \rt@addtoRVV{br}\rt@itsskiplinefalse
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, if this is not a \texttt{skipline}, and the previous token is not a \texttt{skipline},
+% we induce a \texttt{par}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \rt@addtoRVV{par}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \rt@addtoRVV{#1}%
+ \def\rt@next{\setRVVContent@i}%
+ \fi
+ \fi\rt@next
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\useRVContent}
+% \verb!\useRVConent{<name>}!
+% \begin{macro}{\useVContent}
+% \verb!\useVConent{<name>}!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\useRVContent#1{\@nameuse{#1-vcont}}
+\def\useVContent#1{\@nameuse{#1-pcont}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+\endinput
+
+% iPad
+% Landscape
+% w: 7.75in
+% h: 5.8in
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.ins b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6d01d8e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/richtext/richtext.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1999-2016 D. P. Story
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `AcroTeX eDucation Bundle'.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+%% License, either version 1.2 of this license or (at your option) any
+%% later version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\filedate{2012/01/22}
+\def\batchfile{richtext.ins}
+
+\input docstrip
+\ifx\generate\undefined
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+ \Msg{* version 2.4 or later.}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex and get a newer one.}
+ \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+ \batchmode
+ \csname @@end\endcsname\end
+\fi
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+
+\generate
+{%
+ \file{richtext.sty}{\from{richtext.dtx}{copyright,package}}
+}
+
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space To finish the installation you have to copy the files }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space *.sty, *.cfg and *.def into a directory searched by TeX}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.pdf b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5b0bbca6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97febc04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/doc/yt4pdf_man.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,737 @@
+% makeindex < aebpro_man.idx > aebpro_man.ind
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[fleqn]{amsmath}
+\usepackage[
+ web={centertitlepage,designv,tight*,usetemplates,
+ forcolorpaper,latextoc,pro},%usesf,
+ eforms,aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+%\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{aeb_mlink}
+\usepackage{array}
+\usepackage[altbullet]{lucidbry}
+
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\makeindex
+\usepackage{acroman}
+
+\usepackage[active]{srcltx}
+
+\def\expath{../examples}
+
+\urlstyle{rm}
+\def\pkg{\textsf}
+\let\app\textsf
+\let\opt\texttt
+\let\uif\textsf
+\let\env\texttt
+\def\meta#1{\textit{\texttt{#1}}}
+\def\ameta#1{$\langle\textit{\texttt{#1}}\rangle$}
+\newdimen\aebdimen \aebdimen6pt %\partopsep \advance\aebdimen\partopsep
+\newcommand\bVerb[1][]{\begingroup#1\vskip\aebdimen\parindent0pt}%
+\def\eVerb{\vskip\aebdimen\endgroup\noindent}
+\def\SUB#1{\ensuremath{{}_{\text{#1}}}}
+\def\darg#1{\texttt{\{#1\}}}
+\def\takeMeasure{\bgroup\obeyspaces\takeMeasurei}
+\def\takeMeasurei#1{\global\setbox\webtempboxi\hbox{\ttfamily#1}\egroup}
+\def\bxSize{\wd\webtempboxi+2\fboxsep+2\fboxrule}
+\let\amtIndent\leftmargini
+\makeatletter
+\def\setDisplayNumber#1#2{\kern0pt
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{0pt}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{0pt}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{0pt}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{0pt}%
+ \begin{equation}\label{#2}\end{equation}\kern0pt
+}
+\renewenvironment{quote}[1][]
+ {\def\@rgi{#1}\ifx\@rgi\@empty
+ \let\rghtm\@empty\else\def\rghtm{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\fi
+ \list{}{\rghtm} %{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+\renewcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont #1}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}
+\renewcommand*{\theparagraph}{\texorpdfstring{\protect\P\protect\ }{\textparagraph}}
+\renewcommand{\paragraph}
+ {\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\theparagraph}%
+ \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{0pt}{6pt}{-3pt}{\color{\aeb@subsubsectioncolor}\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{5.0em}{1em}} %{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\def\chgCurrLblName#1{\def\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\def\echgCurrLblName#1{\edef\@currentlabelname{#1}}
+\makeatother
+
+
+\newcommand{\YouTube}{\textsf{YouTube}}
+
+
+%\def\tutpath{doc/tutorial}
+%\def\tutpathi{tutorial}
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ university={\AcroTeX.Net},
+ title={The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{yt4PDF} Package\\[1em]}{: }
+ Playing \texorpdfstring{\YouTube}{YouTube} Videos in PDF},
+ author={D. P. Story},
+ email={dpstory@acrotex.net},
+ subject={Playing YouTube Videos in PDF},
+ talksite={\url{www.acrotex.net}},
+ version={1.1, 2016/10/04},
+ keywords={AcroTeX, PDF, YouTube, rmannot},
+ copyrightStatus=True,
+ copyrightNotice={Copyright (C) \the\year, D. P. Story},
+ copyrightInfoURL={http://www.acrotex.net}
+}
+
+\def\dps{$\hbox{$\mathfrak D$\kern-.3em\hbox{$\mathfrak P$}%
+ \kern-.6em \hbox{$\mathcal S$}}$}
+
+\universityLayout{fontsize=Large}
+\titleLayout{fontsize=LARGE}
+\authorLayout{fontsize=Large}
+\tocLayout{fontsize=Large,color=aeb}
+\sectionLayout{indent=-40pt,fontsize=large,color=aeb} %,afterskip=1sp}
+\subsectionLayout{indent=-20pt,color=aeb} %,afterskip=1sp}
+\subsubsectionLayout{indent=0pt,color=aeb} %,afterskip=1sp}
+\subsubDefaultDing{\texorpdfstring{$\bullet$}{\textrm\textbullet}}
+
+\newenvironment{eqComments}[1][\strut]{\smallskip\leftskip-\labelwidth
+\item[]\textbf{\textcolor{blue}{#1}}}{\par\smallskip}
+
+%\pagestyle{empty}
+%\parindent0pt\parskip\medskipamount
+
+\chngDocObjectTo{\newDO}{doc}
+\begin{docassembly}
+var titleOfManual="The yt4pdf MANUAL";
+var manualfilename="Manual_BG_Print_yt4pdf.pdf";
+var manualtemplate="Manual_BG_Brown.pdf"; // Blue, Green, Brown
+var _pathToBlank="C:/Users/Public/Documents/ManualBGs/"+manualtemplate;
+var doc;
+var buildIt=false;
+if ( buildIt ) {
+ console.println("Creating new " + manualfilename + " file.");
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: _pathToBlank, bHidden: true});
+ var _path=this.path;
+ var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+ _path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+ \docSaveAs\newDO ({ cPath: _path });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+ doc = \appopenDoc({cPath: manualfilename, oDoc:this, bHidden: true});
+ f=doc.getField("ManualTitle");
+ f.value=titleOfManual;
+ doc.flattenPages();
+ \docSaveAs\newDO({ cPath: manualfilename });
+ doc.closeDoc();
+} else {
+ console.println("Using the current "+manualfilename+" file.");
+}
+var _path=this.path;
+var pos=_path.lastIndexOf("/");
+_path=_path.substring(0,pos)+"/"+manualfilename;
+\addWatermarkFromFile({
+ bOnTop:false,
+ bOnPrint:false,
+ cDIPath:_path
+});
+\executeSave();
+\end{docassembly}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\selectColors{linkColor=black}
+\tableofcontents
+\selectColors{linkColor=webgreen}
+
+\section{Introduction}\label{s:intro}
+
+ I believe that I was vaguely aware of the \href{http://code.google.com/apis/youtube/flash_api_reference.html}
+{{\YouTube} ActionScript 3.0 Player},\footnote{The YouTube AcrionScript 2.0 Player API
+ has been deprecated as of January 27, 2015; however, it is still supported, for now.} but never pursued it because of my
+general lack of interest in {\YouTube} (\url{www.youtube.com}). Recently, I
+came across a very nice demo PDF that used the API, see
+%\mlhref{http://www.uvsar.com/pdftube/}{PDF Tube - {\YouTube} API wrapper for PDF documents}.
+``PDF Tube - {\YouTube} API wrapper for PDF documents'' (the page has
+since been removed).
+The SWF file and JavaScript are made freely available, so I
+downloaded it, and was sufficiently impressed to port the example to
+{\LaTeX} using various members of the {Acro\negthinspace\TeX} Fine Family of Software
+\verb!:-{)!. The SWF file and JavaScript are due to the good folks at
+\textbf{UVSAR} (\url{www.uvsar.com}). The \textbf{UVSAR}'s sample demo also appeared in the forums of
+the \href{http://acrobatusers.com/forum/javascript/embed-youtube-video-pdf}{Acrobat User
+Community}.
+
+The \textsf{yt4pdf} package uses the \textsf{rmannot} to embed the \textsf{SWF}
+file that plays the {\YouTube} videos. There is a complete set of buttons
+that come with the package to control the video: play, pause, stop
+loading, rewind, load a video by its {\YouTube} video ID, and a button to
+view a video on the {\YouTube} web site.\footnote{Some videos do not allow
+embedded playback, and must be viewed on the {\YouTube} web site.}
+
+% http://acrobatusers.com/news/youtube-widget-acrobat
+
+\subsection{Sample files}
+
+The following are the sample files shipped with \textsf{yt4pdf}:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{yt4pdf-1.tex} demonstrates the basic functionality of
+ the {\YouTube} RMA: the use of the poster, including \cs{ytComboList},
+ \cs{ytComboBtn}, and \cs{ytvId}.
+ \item \texttt{yt4pdf-2.tex} experiments with different ways the
+ {\YouTube} annotation can be displayed
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item As a small icon, videos are played in a floating window,
+ buttons displayed in the running footer.
+ \item[] This one uses a rollover, popup menu system (as opposed to
+ a combo box). The \textsf{popupmenu} package is used.
+ \item Using a built-in poster, with the combo box under the
+ annotation, control buttons in running footer.
+ \item Same as above, but control buttons moved to a two column
+ format.
+ \item Using the custom {\YouTube} for PDF poster with combo box and
+ control buttons under the RMA.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{yt4pdf-3.tex} illustrates the usage of the \texttt{play} and \texttt{load}
+ keys that are passed in the optional parameter of \cs{ytRmAnnot}.
+\end{itemize}
+% Advanced examples \href{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/aebblog.html}{AeB Blog site}.
+
+\section{Requirements}
+
+This package is part of \textsf{AeB Pro}, which means Acrobat Distiller is
+used to create the PDF; the package requires \textsf{rmannot}, which
+creates rich media annotations. Therefore, we require
+\begin{equation*}
+ \boxed{\text{\large\bfseries Adobe Acrobat, version 9.0 or later}}
+\end{equation*}
+To use this package, the document author must have AeB and AeB Pro
+installed, as well as \textsf{rmannot}. The manual for \textsf{rmannot}
+needs to be read closely to properly install it and to function correctly.
+I have made \textsf{rmannot} a required package, and recently
+have made the \textsf{popupmenu} package required as well.
+
+\section{Configuring your installation}
+
+In addition to configuring the \textsf{rmannot} package correctly, the
+\textsf{yt4pdf} package needs configuring as well. The \textsf{yt4pdf} package
+comes with a configuration file \texttt{yt4pdf.cfg}. Open this file in
+your favorite editor to see
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+% yt4pdf config file. Delete the \endinput below and replace the path
+% provided with the path to the swf folder of your yt4pdf installation.
+% This path is used to locate the pdf_tube_basic.swf file, used to play
+% YouTube videos.
+\endinput
+\renewcommand{\ytFolder}{C:/Users/Public/Documents/My TeX Files/%
+tex/latex/aeb/aebpro/yt4pdf/swf}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Edit this file so that \cs{ytFolder} points to the \texttt{swf} folder on
+your computer.
+
+\section{The Rich Mediation Annotation for {\YouTube}}
+
+The Rich Media Annotation (RMA) used is \cs{ytRmAnnot}, its definition
+uses the command \cs{rmAnnot}, which is defined in the \textsf{rmannot} package.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytRmAnnot[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{name}}\darg{\ameta{width}}\darg{\ameta{height}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\xdef\panelWidth{\the\linewidth}%
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytRmAnnot[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(name)}{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth-\panelWidth}
+\setDisplayNumber\label{display:ytRmAnnot}
+\end{minipage}\end{minipage}\endgroup
+\PD
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item The first (optional) parameter is used to pass the key-value pairs of the
+ \cs{rmAnnot} command. Additionally, there are two other \ameta{KV-pairs}
+ recognized, specialized to the \cs{ytRmAnnot} command.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{play=\ameta{vID}} Loads and plays the {\YouTube} video with
+ video ID of \ameta{vID}.
+ \item \texttt{load=\ameta{vID}} Loads the specified video's thumbnail
+ (as specified by \ameta{vID}) and prepares the player to play
+ the video. The player does not request the \textsf{FLV} until the play
+ button is pressed.
+ \end{itemize}
+ When you want to play a {\YouTube} video when the page containing
+ the annotation is opened, use the \texttt{play} key; for example
+ \texttt{play=GZ9e3Dy7obA} causes the video whose video ID is
+ \texttt{GZ9e3Dy7obA} to play when the page is opened.
+
+ See the manual for the \pkg{rmannot} package for more details on the
+ key-value pairs that can be passed through the optional first
+ parameter.
+
+ \item The \ameta{name} parameter is a name used to refer to the
+ annotation through underlying JavaScript code. The \ameta{name}
+ should consist of only letters and numbers. The value of this
+ parameter is placed in the macro \cs{ytCurrRMAName}. This macro is
+ used internally by the various control buttons.
+
+ \item The width of the annotation.
+
+ \item The height of the annotation.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Annot Dimensions.}
+The width and height of the {\YouTube} annotation should be \texttt{571bp}
+and \texttt{330bp}, respectively, or any re-scaling of these dimensions.
+
+Examples,
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ \ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,play=eNzrn8-JFSE,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube1}{571bp}{330bp}
+\end{Verbatim}
+is a ``full-size'' annotation, while
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ \ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,load=eNzrn8-JFSE,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube1}{571bp/2}{330bp/2}
+\end{Verbatim}
+is half that size. The first example above plays a video when
+the page is opened, the second example loads the thumbnail, and waits play
+the video.
+
+You can also re-scale using either \cs{resizebox} or
+\cs{scalebox} from the \textsf{graphicx} package.
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ \resizebox{2in}{!}{\ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube1}{571bp}{330bp}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+or, using \cs{scalebox},
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ \scalebox{.5}{\ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube1}{571bp}{330bp}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\textbf{Running multiple videos at once.} At the time of this writing, the
+\pkg{yt4pdf} package is not designed to run more than one video at a
+time, that's not saying it cannot be done, however. It is not recommended,
+indeed, why would you want to look at two {\YouTube} videos at the same
+time?
+
+For documents with multiple {\YouTube} annotations over
+several pages it is recommended, therefore, that the \texttt{deactivated=pageclose}
+should be used in the optional parameter list of the \cs{ytRmAnnot}
+command.
+
+\subsection{The \texorpdfstring{\protect\textsf{yt4pdf}}{yt4pdf} Poster}
+
+The \textsf{rmannot} package provides a standard poster (a gray rectangle
+with text in the lower left corner). However, there is an especially
+designed poster, designed by the folks at \textbf{UVSAR}. (See
+Figure~\ref*{pdfytPoster}, page~\pageref*{pdfytPoster}.)
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics[scale=.5]{./graphics/pdfyt_poster}\\
+ \caption{YouTube for PDF poster}\label{pdfytPoster}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+\goodbreak
+\textbf{To use this really cool poster:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Insert the following line into the preamble,
+\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small]
+ \makePoster[bb=0 0 570.794 329.887]{pdfyt_poster}{pdfyt_poster}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The optional parameter should remain as it is, it adjusts the bounding
+box so that the poster is properly placed.
+
+\item Use the \texttt{poster} key in the first optional parameter of
+\cs{ytRmAnnot}, like so,
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ \ytRmAnnot[poster=pdfyt_poster,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube}{571bp}{330bp}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Control Buttons}
+
+The {\YouTube} rich media annotation (as created by \cs{ytRmAnnot}), comes
+with six (optional) control buttons.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytSelect[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{vID}}\darg{\ameta{width}}\darg{\ameta{height}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytPlayToggle[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\ytStopLoading[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\ytMuteToggle[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\ytRewind[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\ytSelect[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(vID)}{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\ytOpenWeb[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\endgroup
+\PD The labels are self-explanatory, the \texttt{<kv-pairs>} parameter is
+the standard \textsf{eforms} optional parameter for changing the
+appearance of the form. The \ameta{vID} parameter for \cs{ytSelect} is
+a {\YouTube} video ID.
+
+\goodbreak
+\CmdDescription We give brief descriptions of each of the six control
+buttons.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \cs{ytPlayToggle}:
+ This button has several functions, \textsf{PAUSE}, \textsf{PLAY}, \textsf{BUFFERING}, and \textsf{REPLAY}.
+ Initially the button label is on \textsf{PAUSE} (pressing it pauses a playing video);
+ the button label reads \textsf{PLAY} when the video is loaded and paused (pressing it plays or resumes
+ the video); while the video is loading, the button label is
+ \textsf{BUFFERING\dots}. After the video finishes playing, the button
+ label is changed to \textsf{Replay}.
+ \item \cs{ytStopLoading}: Pressing this button stops the streaming of the currently playing
+ video. If the video is started again, there will be some buffering before the play begins.
+ \item \cs{ytMuteToggle}: This button toggles and sound off and on. Button labels are
+ \textsf{MUTE} and \textsf{UNMUTE}.
+ \item \cs{ytRewind}: If the video is playing, this button
+ stops the video, rewinds it to the beginning, and starts play again. If the video
+ is paused, this button rewinds the video to the beginning, the video remains paused.
+ \item \cs{ytSelect}: When this button is pressed, a response dialog opens.
+ The user enters a {\YouTube} video ID into the field. On pressing OK, this video is played.
+
+ \item[] The second parameter \ameta{vID} is the default video
+ that is displayed in the input box of the response box that opens.
+ \item[] \textbf{Note:} Some {\YouTube} videos are security
+ restricted and cannot be played through an embedded player, such as the one used here.
+ If video ID of a video that does not allow embedded playback, a dialog appears giving
+ the user the opportunity to view the video on the web.
+ \item \cs{ytOpenWeb}: The user has the option of pressing this button to view the
+ current video on the web at \texttt{www.youtube.com}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The first (optional) parameter can be used to modify the appearance of the
+individual buttons. To modify the appearances of the buttons as a group,
+use,
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytBtnPresets\darg{\ameta{KV-pairs}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytBtnPresets{!ameta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+The key-value pairs are ones defined for form fields created by the \textsf{eforms}
+package. The default definition is,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ytBtnPresets{\BC{.5 0 0}\S{S}\textFont{HeBo}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+The second parameter of \cs{ytRmAnnot} is the name to be associated with
+that annot; the name of the annot is not known until after the annot is
+defined. The command \cs{DeclareYTName},
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\DeclareYTName\darg{\ameta{name}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\DeclareYTName{!ameta(name)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+allows you to define the name prior to the creation of the annot. This is
+useful if you want to place the control buttons above the annot itself. By
+specifying the name, the control buttons will know the name of the annot
+they are to control.
+
+\subsection{Controls for playing a {\YouTube} video}
+
+To actually play a video, you must pass a video ID to the underlying SWF
+file. We present two methods here, through links and through a combo box.
+One of the example files, \texttt{yt4pdf-2.pdf}, illustrates another method
+using a popup menu.
+
+\subsubsection{Playing a video through a link}
+
+The command \cs{ytvId} creates a list such that when you click on it, the
+video specified by the second parameter of the command is played in the
+associated Rich Media annotation created by \cs{ytRmAnnot}. The associated
+RMA is the one most recently defined prior to the link. If the link occurs
+before the target RMA, you can use \cs{DeclareYTName} to set the name of
+the target RMA for the link.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytvId[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{vID}}\darg{\ameta{text}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytvId[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(vID)}{!ameta(text)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\endgroup
+\PD The first parameter takes the usual key-value pairs for links created
+by the \textsf{eforms} package. The second parameter is the video ID to be
+played. The third parameter is the text to be displayed by the link,
+usually the title of the {\YouTube} video.
+
+\cs{ytvId} loads and plays the specified video; there is an
+\texttt{*}-form of this command,
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytvId*[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{vID}}\darg{\ameta{text}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytvId*[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(vID)}{!ameta(text)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+When this form is used, the {\YouTube} thumbnail image for the video is
+displayed. The player does not
+request the video until the play button is pressed.
+
+You can set the appearances for a all links created by \cs{ytvId} by using
+\cs{ytvIdPresets}
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytvIdPresets\darg{\ameta{KV-pairs}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytvIdPresets{!ameta(KV-pairs)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+The key-value pairs are ones defined for form fields created by the \textsf{eforms}
+package. The default definition is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ytvIdPresets{\linktxtcolor{webbrown}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsubsection{Playing a video using a combo box}
+
+You can created a combo box with a play list. There are three commands
+that create the combo list, \cs{ytPlayList}, \cs{ytComboList}, and
+\cs{ytComboBtn}.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytPlayList\darg{\ameta{default\_vId}}\darg{\ameta{playlist}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytPlayList{!ameta(default_vId)}{!ameta(playlist)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+This command sets the play list to be displayed in the combo box, it needs
+to be executed before the actual creation of the combo box (using
+\cs{ytComboList}). The first parameter is the default video ID, this title
+will be initially displayed by the combo box. The \ameta{playlist} is
+an array of video IDs and title pairs. The \ameta{playlist} is conveniently defined
+within the \cs{declarePlayList} command:
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\declarePlayList\darg{\ameta{\cs{plCmd}}}\{\%}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\declarePlayList{!ameta(\plCmd)}{%
+ !ameta(array-of-vIDs-titles)
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb The array of video IDs and title pairs are saved under the command name \ameta{plCmd}.
+For example
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\declarePlayList{\playList}{%
+ [(GZ9e3Dy7obA)(Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)})]
+ [(eNzrn8-JFSE)(Open at Adobe)]
+ [(5y9-EVmreU4)(Lori's Corner: Episode \#1)]
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The format for each pair is \texttt{[(\ameta{vId})(\ameta{title})]}. Notice that in the case
+of the Bruce Lee video, the title itself contains parentheses; to avoid parsing errors when
+the \pkg{eforms} package builds the combo box, \emph{enclose these parentheses in a pair of matching braces}.
+
+In the example above, the array, in its correct format, is loaded
+conveniently into a macro \cs{playList} declared through \cs{declarePlayList}. The macro may then be passed as the
+second parameter of \cs{ytPlayList}. Thus, an example of the use of
+\cs{ytPlayList} is
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent]
+\ytPlayList{eNzrn8-JFSE}{\playList}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+There is a convenience command, \cs{ytIdTitle}, that is used to build
+a \cs{ytPlayList}.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytIdTitle\darg{\ameta{vId}}\darg{\ameta{title}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytIdTitle{!ameta(vId)}{!ameta(title)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+The above example can the be re-written as,
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small]
+\declarePlayList{\playList}{%
+ \ytIdTitle{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)}}
+ \ytIdTitle{eNzrn8-JFSE}{Open at Adobe}
+ \ytIdTitle{5y9-EVmreU4}{Lori's Corner: Episode \#1}
+}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\paragraph*{The combo box.} The syntax for the combo box itself is
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytComboList[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{width}}\darg{\ameta{height}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytComboList[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+The \cs{ytComboList} is a combo box of video Ids and titles. The user
+selects a video based on its title, then presses the \textsf{PLAY} button
+(see \cs{ytComboBtn} below). This command is executed \emph{before}
+\cs{ytComboBtn} to set the play list, and the default value.
+\PD\begin{itemize}
+ \item \ameta{KV-pairs}: (optional) The key-value pairs associated with an
+ \textsf{eforms} form field, used to change the appearance of the field.
+ \item \ameta{width}: The width of the combo box
+ \item \ameta{height}: The height of the combo box
+\end{itemize}
+The appearance can be changed locally by the optional first parameter. The
+command \cs{ytComboListPresets} is used to change all combo lists create
+by \cs{ytComboList}. The command takes has one parameter, the key-value
+pairs for changing the appearance. The default definition is
+\verb!\ytComboListPresets{}!.
+
+Originally, I visualized only one combo box per page, recently that
+mind-set has changed. Should you want several combo boxes, as created by
+\cs{ytComboList}, each box must have a unique name. To that end
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytNewBaseName[\ameta{name}]}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytNewBaseName[!ameta(name)]
+\ytResetBaseName
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+The first command, \cs{ytNewBaseName}, has one optional parameter, if no
+parameter is supplied, then a base name will be generated; otherwise,
+the title of the combo box will be based on the \ameta{name} passed to
+it. For the command \cs{ytResetBaseName}, the first command effects the JS
+and the field name of \cs{ytComboBtn} described below.
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\amtIndent,fontsize=\small,commandchars=!()]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \ytNewBaseName\relax\ytPlayList{!ameta(default_Id)}{\playListii}%
+ \ytComboList{2.5in}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn{33bp}{11bp}
+\item \ytNewBaseName[Listiii]\ytPlayList{!ameta(default_Id)}{\playListiii}%
+ \ytComboList{2.5in}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{itemize}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Note:}} Because \cs{ytNewBaseName} has an optional
+argument, you should place a \cs{relax} after \cs{ytNewBaseName} to prevent
+premature expansion of the \cs{ytplayList} command that follows.
+
+\newtopic Once the selection has been made from the combo box, the user
+can play the selection by pressing the button created by \cs{ytComboBtn}.
+\bVerb\takeMeasure{\string\ytComboBtn[\ameta{KV-pairs}]\darg{\ameta{width}}\darg{\ameta{height}}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\bxSize}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,commandchars=!(),rulecolor=\color{red}]
+\ytComboBtn[!ameta(KV-pairs)]{!ameta(width)}{!ameta(height)}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\eVerb
+\textbf{\textcolor{red}{Note:}} If you hold down the shift key and click on
+the button, the thumbnail poster is loaded, and the player is ready to
+play the video.
+\PD\begin{itemize}
+ \item \ameta{KV-pairs}: (optional) The key-value pairs associated with an
+ \textsf{eforms} form field, used to change the appearance of the field.
+ \item \ameta{width}: The width of the combo box
+ \item \ameta{height}: The height of the combo box
+\end{itemize}
+The appearance can be changed locally by the optional first parameter. The
+command \cs{ytComboBtnPresets} is used to change all combo lists create
+by \cs{ytComboBtn}. The command takes has one parameter, the key-value
+pairs for changing the appearance. The default definition is
+\verb!\ytComboBtnPresets{}!.
+
+\subsection{Using the \textsf{popupmenu} package}
+
+The \pkg{popupmenu} a required package, \pkg{yt4pdf} adds some commands and
+JS to facilitate its usage. The demo file for this feature is
+\texttt{yt4pdf-2.tex}, where you will find some comments in the source file.
+
+In the preamble, we define our menu structure,
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\leftmargini,fontsize=\fontsize{9}{11}\selectfont]
+\begin{popupmenu}{YTMenu}
+ \puIdTitle{Select a You Tube Video}{} % A title has no yt Id
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Music Videos}
+ \puIdTitle{Ink Spots - If I didn't care}{rvwfLe6sLis}
+ \puIdTitle{Ink Spots - My Prayer}{h7KJCns5v3g}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Adobe Related Videos}
+ \puIdTitle{Open at Adobe}{eNzrn8-JFSE}
+ \puIdTitle{Lori's Corner Episode \#1}{5y9-EVmreU4}
+ \puIdTitle{Intro to PDF Portfolios}{T9Yzo_hlwP0}
+ \end{submenu}
+\end{popupmenu}
+\ytPopupMenuData{\YTMenu}
+\end{Verbatim}
+The \cs{puIdTitle} is a convenience macro to enter the menu data; the
+first argument is the title of the {\YouTube} video, the second argument
+is the {\YouTube} ID. There may be several \texttt{popupmenu} environments, each
+with a different name. After the last such environment, execute the
+\cs{ytPopuMenuData} command, seen in line~(12). Its argument is a token
+list of all popupmenus; here, we have only one. If there are several, they
+are listed as follows:
+\begin{Verbatim}[xleftmargin=\leftmargini]
+\ytPopupMenuData{\YTMenu\myEduVids\myMusicVids}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+The menu is displayed as an mouse-over action of button, here is the
+verbatim listing from \texttt{yt4pdf-2.tex}
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[numbers=left,xleftmargin=\leftmargini,fontsize=\fontsize{9}{11}\selectfont]
+\DeclareYTName{ytInWindow}
+...
+\newcommand{\myPBPresets}{%
+ \CA{YT Menu}\textColor{0 0 1}\W1\BC{}\textSize{0}\S{S}
+ \AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{ytPopupMenu("\ytCurrRMAName",YTMenu)}}}}
+\setWindowDimPos{%
+ position={halign=center,valign=center,hoffset=0,voffset=0},
+ width={default=571},height={default=330}}%
+\setlength{\pichskip}{3pt}
+\parpic(.25in,.25in){%
+\parbox{.25in}{\offinterlineskip\resizebox{.25in}{!}{%
+ \ytRmAnnot[windowed,poster=yt_poster,deactivated=pageclose]%
+ {ytInWindow}{72bp}{72bp}%
+}}}
+\pushButton[\presets{\myPBPresets}]{myYTMenu}{20bp}{5bp}
+On this page, the You Tube annotation is icon size and the
+video is played in a floating window.
+\end{Verbatim}
+\textbf{Comments:}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item In line~(1) we declare the name of the {\YouTube} annot to be
+ used. We do this because we need to use the name before the annot is
+ defined. The annot itself is not defined until line~(12).
+ \item Lines~(3)--(5): Define a command to be used for passing the
+ button attributes for the \texttt{myYTMenu} button (seen in
+ line~(15)). In line~(5) we define the action for the button; it is a
+ mouse enter action that executes the \texttt{ytPopupMenu} JS function
+ defined in the \texttt{yt2pdf} package. This function takes two
+ arguments, the first is the name of the target Rich Media Annotation
+ hat will display the videos, this name is \verb!"\ytCurrRMAName"!,
+ where \cs{ytCurrRMAName} holds the name of the most recent {\YouTube}
+ annotation. The second argument is the name of the menu data (defined
+ by the \texttt{popupmenu} environment.
+ \item Lines~(9)--(14): We create an annot so that it appears as an
+ icon, the text of the paragraph wraps around the icon. This is what we
+ do with the \cs{parpic} command. In lines~(12)--(13), we create the
+ {\YouTube} annot using \cs{ytRmAnnot}.
+ \item In line~(15) we have a button with a mouse rollover action. Note
+ we pass the earlier defined presets to this button.
+\end{itemize}
+See the complete source file in \texttt{yt4pdf-2.tex}.
+
+
+\section{Language localizations}
+
+The default language for \textsf{yt4pdf} is English; the English strings
+that \textsf{yt4pdf} uses are listed below. These can be redefined as
+desired.
+\begin{Verbatim}
+\newcommand{\ytStrPLAY}{PLAY}
+\newcommand{\ytStrREPLAY}{REPLAY}
+\newcommand{\ytStrPAUSE}{PAUSE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrBuffering}{Buffering...}
+\newcommand{\ytStrStopLoading}{Stop Loading}
+\newcommand{\ytStrMUTE}{MUTE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrUNMUTE}{UNMUTE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrREWIND}{REWIND}
+\newcommand{\ytStrLoadVideo}{Load Video}
+\newcommand{\ytStrWatchOnWeb}{Watch on YouTube}
+% response dialog box associated with ytSelect()
+\newcommand{\ytRespQues}{Enter the YouTube Video ID}
+\newcommand{\ytRespTitle}{Load a Video}
+\newcommand{\ytRespLabel}{ID:}
+% alert error messages
+\newcommand{\ytStrErrorVideoNotFound}{Error: Video not found}
+\newcommand{\ytStrErrorNoEmbed}{Error: This video does not allow
+ embedded playback \r\r Would you like to view this video
+ on the web?}
+\newcommand{\ytStrConnecTimedOut}{Connection timed out, try again.}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\bigskip
+
+That's all for now, I simply must get back to my retirement. {\dps}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/config_intacc.def b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/config_intacc.def
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ac2e0f8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/config_intacc.def
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}[t]{3in}\parindent20pt\small
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\bfseries\normalsize\color{blue}Configuring
+Preferences}\\[3pt]
+To avoid the security alerts when loading FLV files from You Tube,
+configure your preferences as described below.
+
+Start Adobe Reader 9 or later (or Acrobat~9 or later), and open the \textbf{Preferences}
+dialog box (located in the menu system by selecting \textbf{Edit
+\texttt{>} Preferences} or using the shortcut Ctrl+K); select
+\textbf{Trust Manager} from the left-hand \textbf{Categories} panel. On
+the right side of the dialog box, press the button labeled \textbf{Change
+Settings}, shown below.\par\vspace*{3pt}\centering
+\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{graphics/trustmanager}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[t]{\linewidth-3in-10pt}\small
+In the \textbf{Manage Internet Access}, make selections as
+indicated by the red boxes.\par\medskip
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\bfseries\normalsize\color{blue}For Version 9}\\[3pt]
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\includegraphics[width=2in]{graphics/MIA9}}\\[3pt]
+That is, select \textbf{Allow all web sites}\par\medskip
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\bfseries\normalsize\color{blue}For Version 10}\\[3pt]
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\includegraphics[width=2in]{graphics/MIAX}}\\[3pt]
+\textbf{Allow PDF files to access all web sites}\par\medskip
+Exit the dialogs, and try \textbf{YT4PDF}!
+\end{minipage}
+
+\newpage
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIA9.eps b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIA9.eps
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e68a0a0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIA9.eps
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIAX.eps b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIAX.eps
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..71bdbbc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/MIAX.eps
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/trustmanager.eps b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/trustmanager.eps
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ee141a72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/trustmanager.eps
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/yt_icon_sm.eps b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/yt_icon_sm.eps
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2e6e0ff1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/graphics/yt_icon_sm.eps
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-1.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fac944ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+%
+% the driver line is not necessary if you
+% have aebpro.cfg configured to your driver.
+%
+\usepackage[%
+ web={designv,pro,tight,usesf,usetemplates},
+ eforms,graphicxsp={showembeds},aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+\usepackage{rmannot}
+\usepackage{yt4pdf}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+
+\textBgColor{lightgray}
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ title=The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{yt4pdf} Package\\[3pt]}{yt4pdf Package: }Demo 1 of You Tube API,
+ author=D. P. Story,
+ university=Acro\negthinspace\TeX.Net,
+ email=dpstory@acrotex.net,
+ subject={Live streamed video from YouTube.com},
+ keywords={You Tube, AeB, rmannot},
+ talksite=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+ talkdate={\today}
+}
+\talkdateLabel{Published:}
+
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+
+\makePoster{pdfyt_poster}{pdfyt_poster}
+
+\parindent=0pt\parskip6pt
+\rheader{}
+
+\DeclarePageLayout{footskip=29pt}
+
+\declarePlayList{\playList}{% dps note I've put these parentheses within braces, that was the problem.
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)}}{GZ9e3Dy7obA}
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Original, must view on YouTube)}}{jhUkGIsKvn0}
+ \ytIdTitle{RAF Sculthorpe {(Watch for my Mom!)}}{K7H8QghVs9k}
+ \ytIdTitle{Rocket Jump}{7XzdZ4KcI8Y}
+ \ytIdTitle{Abdul And Cleopatra - Jonathan Richman and the Modern Lovers}{mLDF5MBMWHE}
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\input{config_intacc.def}
+
+\begin{center}\bfseries\Large\color{blue}YT4PDF\end{center}
+
+
+%\previewtrue
+
+\begin{minipage}{571bp/2}
+\ytRmAnnot[poster=pdfyt_poster,deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube}{571bp/2}{330bp/2}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth-290bp-10bp}\centering
+\ytPlayToggle{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytStopLoading[\textSize{0}]{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytMuteToggle{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytRewind{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytSelect[\textSize{0}]{eNzrn8-JFSE}{1in}{11bp}\\[6bp]
+\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}]{1in}{11bp}
+\end{minipage}
+
+\medskip
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\raggedcolumns\bfseries
+Favorites to play:\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}
+\begin{multicols}{2}\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}%
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \ytComboList{\linewidth-1bp-33bp}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}
+\item \ytvId{_iUnOpPEg0w}{TegrityGuy}
+
+\item \ytvId*{eNzrn8-JFSE}{Open at Adobe} (load thumbnail)
+
+\columnbreak
+
+\item \ytvId{q-iiFo-6Vi0}{Digital Signature in 9.0 Pro}
+\item \ytvId{5y9-EVmreU4}{Lori's Corner: Episode \#1}
+\item \ytvId{T9Yzo_hlwP0}{Intro to PDF Portfolios}
+\end{itemize}
+\end{multicols}
+\end{flushleft}
+
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-2.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..558b3928
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+%
+% the driver line is not necessary if you
+% have aebpro.cfg configured to your driver.
+%
+\usepackage[%
+ web={designv,pro,tight,usesf,usetemplates},
+ eforms,graphicxsp={showembeds},aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+\usepackage{yt4pdf}
+\usepackage{picins}
+
+% \textBgColor{lightgray}
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ title=The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{yt4pdf} Package\\[3pt]}{yt4pdf Package: }Demo 2 of You Tube API,
+ author=D. P. Story,
+ university=Acro\negthinspace\TeX.Net,
+ email=dpstory@acrotex.net,
+ subject={Live streamed video from YouTube.com},
+ keywords={You Tube, AeB, rmannot},
+ talksite=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+ talkdate={\today}
+}
+\talkdateLabel{Published:}
+
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+
+\makePoster{pdfyt_poster}{pdfyt_poster}
+\makePoster{yt_poster}{graphics/yt_icon_sm}
+
+\parindent=0pt\parskip6pt
+\rheader{}
+
+\DeclarePageLayout{footskip=15.5pt}
+
+%\previewtrue
+
+\declarePlayList{\playList}{%
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)}}{GZ9e3Dy7obA}
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Original, must view on YouTube)}}{jhUkGIsKvn0}
+ \ytIdTitle{RAF Sculthorpe {(Watch for my Mom!)}}{K7H8QghVs9k}
+ \ytIdTitle{Rocket Jump}{7XzdZ4KcI8Y}
+}
+
+%
+% Note: popupmenu package version 1.0 (2010/09/18) or later required here.
+%
+\begin{popupmenu}{YTMenu}
+ \puIdTitle{Select a You Tube Video}{} % A title has no yt Id
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Music Videos}
+ \puIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting (Bruce Lee version)}{GZ9e3Dy7obA}
+ \puIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting (Original, view on You Tube)}{jhUkGIsKvn0}
+ \puIdTitle{Ink Spots - If I didn't care}{rvwfLe6sLis}
+ \puIdTitle{Ink Spots - My Prayer}{h7KJCns5v3g}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Adobe Related Videos}
+ \puIdTitle{Open at Adobe}{eNzrn8-JFSE}
+ \puIdTitle{Lori's Corner Episode \#1}{5y9-EVmreU4}
+ \puIdTitle{Intro to PDF Portfolios}{T9Yzo_hlwP0}
+ \end{submenu}
+ \begin{submenu}{title=Action Videos}
+ \puIdTitle{Rocket Jump}{7XzdZ4KcI8Y}
+ \puIdTitle{AimBot}{NYGlWjIKoY4}
+ \puIdTitle{Flower Warfare}{031Dshcnso4}
+ \puIdTitle{Modern Warfare: Frozen Crossing Pt. 1}{rzQMGMuD1sU}
+ \puIdTitle{Modern Warfare: Frozen Crossing Pt. 2}{a08ViuvORRM}
+ \end{submenu}
+\end{popupmenu}
+
+% After defining all menus used with YouTube videos, we declare them using \ytPopupMenuData
+% The argument is a token list: \ytPopupMenuData{\myEducationMenu\myFunMenu...}
+\ytPopupMenuData{\YTMenu}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\input{config_intacc.def}
+
+
+\begin{center}\bfseries\Large\color{blue}YT4PDF\end{center}
+
+\DeclareYTName{ytInWindow}
+\ytBtnPresets{\BC{.5 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}\textFont{HeBo}}%
+{\setlength{\dimen0}{(\linewidth)/6-1bp}\xdef\ytWidth{\the\dimen0}} %-.5bp
+\cfooter{\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\kern1bp\ytPlayToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytStopLoading[\textSize{0}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp
+\ytMuteToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytRewind{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp
+\ytSelect[\textSize{0}]{eNzrn8-JFSE}{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}}}
+
+\newcommand{\myPBPresets}{\CA{YT Menu}\textColor{0 0 1}\W1\BC{}\textSize{0}
+ \S{S}\AA{\AAMouseEnter{\JS{ytPopupMenu("\ytCurrRMAName",YTMenu)}}}}
+
+\setWindowDimPos{position={halign=center,valign=center,hoffset=0,voffset=0},
+ width={default=571},height={default=330}}%
+
+\setlength{\pichskip}{3pt}
+\parpic(.25in,.25in){%
+\parbox{.25in}{\offinterlineskip\resizebox{.25in}{!}
+{\ytRmAnnot[windowed,poster=yt_poster,deactivated=pageclose]{ytInWindow}{72bp}{72bp}}}}
+\pushButton[\presets{\myPBPresets}]{myYTMenu}{20bp}{5bp}
+On this page, the You Tube annotation is icon size and the video is played
+in a floating window.
+
+Move the window by dragging its title bar. Resize it by dragging the
+lower-right corner. Close the window by clicking on the upper-right
+corner.
+
+The \textsf{YT Menu} uses the \textsf{popupmenu} package. Alternatively,
+we could just use the combo box that has been used already, but, I thought
+we might try something different.
+
+\newpage
+
+\ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube1}{571bp/2}{330bp/2}\\
+\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}\ytComboListPresets{\textSize{9}}%
+\ytComboList{(571bp/2)-1bp-33bp}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}
+
+\newpage
+\cfooter{}
+\begin{minipage}{571bp/2}
+\ytRmAnnot[posternote=AcroTeX PDF Tube,deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube2}{571bp/2}{330bp/2}\\
+\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}\ytComboListPresets{\textSize{9}}%
+\ytComboList{(571bp/2)-1bp-33bp}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth-290bp-10bp}\centering
+\ytPlayToggle{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytStopLoading[\textSize{0}]{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytMuteToggle{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytRewind{1in}{11bp}\\[3bp]
+\ytSelect[\textSize{0}]{eNzrn8-JFSE}{1in}{11bp}\\[6bp]
+\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}]{1in}{11bp}
+\end{minipage}
+
+\newpage
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{571bp/2}
+\ytRmAnnot[poster=pdfyt_poster,deactivated=pageclose]{YouTube3}{571bp/2}{330bp/2}\\
+\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}\ytComboListPresets{\textSize{9}}%
+\ytComboList{(571bp/2)-1bp-33bp}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}\\[1bp]
+{\setlength{\dimen0}{(\linewidth+1bp)/6-1bp}\xdef\ytWidth{\the\dimen0}}%
+\ytPlayToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytStopLoading[\textSize{0}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp
+\ytMuteToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytRewind{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp
+\ytSelect[\textSize{0}]{eNzrn8-JFSE}{\ytWidth}{11bp}\kern1bp
+\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}\CA{View on Web}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-3.tex b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-3.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..03625c9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/examples/yt4pdf-3.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+%\ytIdTitle{No Ordinary Love - Sade}{_WcWHZc8s2I}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+%
+% the driver line is not necessary if you
+% have aebpro.cfg configured to your driver.
+%
+\usepackage[%
+ web={designv,pro,tight,usesf,usetemplates},
+ eforms,graphicxsp={showembeds},aebxmp
+]{aeb_pro}
+\usepackage{yt4pdf}
+
+%\margins{10bp}{10bp}{.5in}{.5in} % left,right,top, bottom
+%\screensize{7.5in}{10in} % height,width dimensions
+
+\textBgColor{lightgray}
+
+\DeclareDocInfo
+{
+ title=The \texorpdfstring{\textsf{yt4pdf} Package\\[3pt]}{yt4pdf Package: }Demo 3 of You Tube API,
+ author=D. P. Story,
+ university=Acro\negthinspace\TeX.Net,
+ email=dpstory@acrotex.net,
+ subject={Live streamed video from YouTube.com},
+ keywords={You Tube, AeB, rmannot},
+ talksite=\url{http://www.acrotex.net},
+ talkdate={\today}
+}\talkdateLabel{Published:}
+
+\def\AcroTeX{Acro\!\TeX}
+
+\makePoster{pdfyt_poster}{pdfyt_poster}
+\makePoster{yt_poster}{graphics/yt_icon_sm}
+
+\parindent=0pt\parskip6pt
+\rheader{}
+
+% dps need to change the catcode of subscript (_) before hyperref gets
+% chance to look at it.
+\declarePlayList{\playList}{%
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)}} {GZ9e3Dy7obA}
+ \ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Original, must view on YouTube)}}{jhUkGIsKvn0}
+ \ytIdTitle{RAF Sculthorpe {(Watch for my Mom!)}} {K7H8QghVs9k}
+ \ytIdTitle{Rocket Jump} {7XzdZ4KcI8Y}
+ \ytIdTitle{No Ordinary Love - Sade} {_WcWHZc8s2I}
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\input{config_intacc.def}
+
+\begin{center}\bfseries\Large\color{blue}YT4PDF\end{center}
+
+\ytBtnPresets{\BC{.5 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}\textFont{HeBo}}%
+
+\resizebox{\linewidth}{!}{\ytRmAnnot[play=eNzrn8-JFSE,poster=pdfyt_poster,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{ytPlayOnOpen}{571bp}{330bp}}\\
+{\setlength{\dimen0}{(\linewidth-2bp)/6}\xdef\ytWidth{\the\dimen0}}%
+\ytPlayToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytStopLoading{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+\ytMuteToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytRewind{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+\ytSelect{eNzrn8-JFSE}{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+
+\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}
+
+% We have to disable the RMA so the combo box can be seen above it.
+Playlist: \ytComboList[\A{\JS{\thisNamedRMA(ytPlayOnOpen).activated=false;}}]{2.5in}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}
+
+\newpage
+\begin{center}\bfseries\Large\color{blue}YT4PDF\end{center}
+
+\resizebox{\linewidth}{!}{\ytRmAnnot[load=GZ9e3Dy7obA,poster=pdfyt_poster,
+ deactivated=pageclose]{ytLoadOnOpen}{571bp}{330bp}}\\
+\ytBtnPresets{\BC{.5 0 0}\W{1}\S{S}\textFont{HeBo}}%
+{\setlength{\dimen0}{(\linewidth-2bp)/6}\xdef\ytWidth{\the\dimen0}}%
+\ytPlayToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytStopLoading{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+\ytMuteToggle{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytRewind{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+\ytSelect{eNzrn8-JFSE}{\ytWidth}{11bp}\ytOpenWeb[\textSize{0}]{\ytWidth}{11bp}%
+
+\ytPlayList{GZ9e3Dy7obA}{\playList}
+
+% We have to disable the RMA so the combo box can be seen above it.
+Playlist: \ytComboList[\A{\JS{\thisNamedRMA(ytLoadOnOpen).activated=false;}}]{2.5in}{11bp}\kern1bp\ytComboBtn[\TU{Click to play, shift-click to load thumbnail only}]{33bp}{11bp}
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/graphics/pdfyt_poster.eps b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/graphics/pdfyt_poster.eps
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97c7ecd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/graphics/pdfyt_poster.eps
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/swf/pdf_tube_basic.swf b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/swf/pdf_tube_basic.swf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5dde7b7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/swf/pdf_tube_basic.swf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.dtx b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ca3bcc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,629 @@
+%\iffalse
+%<*copyright>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% yt4pdf.sty package, %%
+%% Copyright (C) 2010--2016 D. P. Story %%
+%% dpstory@uakron.edu %%
+%% %%
+%% This program can redistributed and/or modified under %%
+%% the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License %%
+%% Distributed from CTAN archives in directory %%
+%% macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either version 1 of the %%
+%% License, or (at your option) any later version. %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%</copyright>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{yt4pdf}
+%<package> [2016/10/04 v1.1 yt4pdf: Play You Tube videos in PDF, Acrobat Distiller only (dps)]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,hyperindex]{hyperref}
+%\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\\\textbackslash}
+%\EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex
+\begin{document}
+\def\CMD#1{\textbackslash#1}
+ \GetFileInfo{yt4pdf.sty}
+ \title{\textsf{yt4pdf}: Package for playing You Tube Videos}
+ \author{D. P. Story\\
+ Email: \texttt{dpstory@uakron.edu}}
+ \date{processed \today}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \let\Email\texttt
+ \DocInput{yt4pdf.dtx}
+ \PrintIndex
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \MakeShortVerb{|}
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\def,\edef,\gdef,\xdef,\global,\long,\let}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\string,\the,\ifx,\else,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\relax,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DeclareTextCommand,\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\@empty,\special}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{rmannot}
+\RequirePackage{popupmenu}[2010/09/18]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% I believe that I was vaguely aware of the \href{http://code.google.com/apis/youtube/flash_api_reference.html}
+%{YouTube ActionScript 3.0 Player}, but never pursued it because of my
+%general lack of interest in You Tube (\url{www.youtube.com}). Recently, I
+%became aware of a very nice demo PDF that used the API, see
+%\href{http://www.uvsar.com/pdftube/}{PDF Tube - YouTube API wrapper for PDF
+%documents}. The SWF file and JavaScript are made freely available, so I
+%downloaded it, and was sufficiently impressed to port the example to
+%{\LaTeX} using various members of the {Acro\negthinspace\TeX} Fine Family of Software
+%\verb!:-{)!. The SWF file and JavaScript are due to the good folks at
+%UVSAR (\url{www.uvsar.com}). The UVSAR's sample demo also appeared in the forums of
+%the \href{http://acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/viewtopic.php?pid=62134}{Acrobat User
+%Community}.
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ytFolder} The path to the folder containing
+% the \texttt{pdf\_Tube\_basic.swf} file. This path is set through
+% the \texttt{yt4pdf.cfg} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytFolder}{C:/Users/Public/Documents/My TeX Files/%
+tex/latex/aeb/aebpro/yt4pdf/swf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{ytSWF} The path to \texttt{pdf\_Tube\_basic.swf}, used
+% as an argument for the \cs{rmAnnot} macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\saveNamedPath{ytSWF}{\ytFolder/pdf_tube_basic.swf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We input the file \texttt{yt4pdf.cfg} which should contain a re-definition
+% of \cs{ytFolder}, the path to the user's installation containing the
+% \texttt{pdf\_tube\_basic.swf}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{yt4pdf.cfg}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{The YouTube RMA}
+% In this section, we define \cs{ytRmAnnot}, a rich media annotation, that is used
+% to play YouTube videos.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% An internal command for getting the rma object based on the current page and the
+% name of the annot.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yt@namegdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname #1\endcsname}
+\def\yt@namexdef#1{\expandafter\xdef\csname #1\endcsname}
+\def\thisNamedRMA(#1){this.getAnnotRichMedia(this.pageNum,"#1")}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \DescribeMacro{play} This is a key-value pair for the \cs{ytRmAnnot} command.
+% The value of \texttt{play} is a YouTube video ID. When the page the annot is
+% on, the video will be played.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{ytRmAnnot}{play}[]{\def\ytrmannot@play{#1}}
+\define@key{ytRmAnnot}{load}[]{\def\ytrmannot@load{#1}}
+\setkeys{ytRmAnnot}{play,load}
+\let\ytCurrRMAName\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytRmAnnot}
+% The \cs{ytRmAnnot} creates a rich media annotation using the \textsf{rmannot} package.
+% It uses the SWF file \texttt{pdf\_Tube\_basic.swf} referenced here by the name of
+% \texttt{ytSWF}. The command takes four parametrs:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{[\#1]}]: The optional first parameter takes the key-value pairs of the
+% \cs{rmAnnot} command, plus the \texttt{play} key, defined above. The play key is used
+% to set the annot up so it plays automatically when the page is opened.
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}]: The name of this annot, unique to the document. This should be
+% a ``JavaScript variable.'' The name populates the command \cs{ytCurrRMAName}, which is
+% needed for the other commands in this package.
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}]: The width of the annot
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}]: The height of the annot
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytRmAnnot}[4][]{\begingroup
+ \@ifundefined{#2@ytrmname}{\yt@namegdef{#2@ytrmname}{#1}}%
+ {\PackageError{yt2pdf}{The name `#2' is already defined
+ for\MessageBreak this \string\ytRmAnnot}{Choose a unique
+ name for this \string\ytRmAnnot, one different from `#2'.}}%
+ \setkeys*{ytRmAnnot}{#1}\gdef\ytCurrRMAName{#2}%
+ \ifx\ytrmannot@play\@empty\else
+ \makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton[\BC{}\BG{}\S{S}
+ \AA{\AAPageOpen{aebStartPlayer(\thisNamedRMA(#2),%
+ "\ytrmannot@play",true);}\AAPageClose{aebCancelWait(false);}}
+ ]{btnRmAnnot#2}{1bp}{1bp}}\let\ytrmannot@load\@empty\fi
+ \ifx\ytrmannot@load\@empty
+ \else\makebox[0pt][l]{\pushButton[\BC{}\BG{}\S{S}
+ \AA{\AAPageOpen{aebStartPlayer(\thisNamedRMA(#2),%
+ "\ytrmannot@load",false);}\AAPageClose{aebCancelWait(false);}}
+ ]{btnRmAnnot#2}{1bp}{1bp}}\fi
+ \rmAnnot[\XKV@rm,name=#2,enabled=onclick]{#3}{#4}{ytSWF}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareYTName} Defines the internal macro
+% \cs{ytCurrRMAName}. This command is needed in the case were links, or
+% control buttons come before the RMA annot. The first parameter is the
+% page on which the target annot resides, the default is the current page.
+% The second argument is the name of the target annot.
+% code passed is
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\DeclareYTName}[2][]{\def\argi{#1}%
+ \ifx\argi\@empty\gdef\ytCurrRMAName{#2}\else
+ \gdef\ytCurrRMAName{[#1]#2}\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Button Controls}
+% We present six control buttons for the rm annot
+% \begin{macro}{\ytBtnPresets}
+% The default appearances of the control buttons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytBtnPresets}[1]{\def\yt@Presets{#1}}
+\ytBtnPresets{\BC{.5 0 0}\S{S}\textFont{HeBo}\autoCenter{n}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% The following six commands all take three parameters, the first one optional
+%\begin{enumerate}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] Standard key-value pairs for modifying the
+% appearance of an eforms form field.
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:]
+% \texttt{this.getAnnotRichMedia(this.pageNum+1, "YouTube")}.
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the width of the button
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the height of the button
+%\end{enumerate}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytPlayToggle}
+% This button has several functions: Pause/Play/Buffering.
+% Initially the button label is on Pause (pressing it pauses a playing video);
+% the button label reads Play when the video is loaded and paused (pressing it plays or resumes
+% the video); while the video is loading, the button label is Buffering...
+% \begin{macro}{\ytStopLoading} Pressing this button stops the streaming of the currently playing
+% video. If the video is started again, there will be some buffering before the play begins.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytMuteToggle} This button toggles and sound off and on. Button labels are
+% MUTE and UNMUTE.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytRewind} If the video is playing, this button
+% stops the video, rewinds it to the beginning, and starts play again. If the video
+% is paused, this button rewinds the video to the beginning, the video remains paused.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytSelect} When this button is pressed, a response dialog opens.
+% The user enters a YouTube video ID into the field. On pressing OK, this video is played.
+% \item[] \textbf{Note:} Some YouTube videos are security
+% restricted and cannot be played through an embedded player, such as the one used here.
+% If video ID of a video that does not allow embedded playback, a dialog appears giving
+% the use to view the video on the web.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytOpenWeb} The user has the option of pressing this button to view the
+% currently video on the web at \texttt{www.youtube.com}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{oyt@RMA} command takes the second parameter of each of the six button commands,
+% and expands it into the appropriate JS code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\oyt@RMA}[1][this.pageNum]{\oyt@@RMA[#1]}
+\def\oyt@@RMA[#1]#2\@nil{\gdef\yt@CurrRMAName{#2}%
+ \def\yt@rm{this.getAnnotRichMedia(#1,"#2")}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We finally define the six control buttons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytPlayToggle}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrPAUSE}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{ytPlayToggle(\yt@rm);}}]{playToggle}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+\newcommand{\ytStopLoading}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrStopLoading}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{\yt@rm.callAS("stopVideo");}}]{vidStop}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+\newcommand{\ytMuteToggle}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrMUTE}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{ytMuteToggle(\yt@rm);}}]{muteToggle}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+\newcommand{\ytRewind}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrREWIND}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{ytRewind(\yt@rm);}}]{ytRewind}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+\newcommand{\ytSelect}[4][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrLoadVideo}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{ytSelect(\yt@rm,"#2");}}]{selectVid}{#3}{#4}%
+}
+\newcommand{\ytOpenWeb}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrWatchOnWeb}\presets{\yt@Presets}#1
+ \A{\JS{ytOpenWeb(\yt@rm);}}]{playOnWeb}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \subsection{Defining a Video Id}
+% \subsubsection{Using a Link}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytvIdPresets}
+% The options for the \cs{ytvId} link. The default is given below in the definition.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytvId}
+% The \cs{ytvId} is link which when pressed plays the video whose Video Id is passed as
+% its second argument.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{[\#1]}:] The name of the annot this video is to play in. When
+% this parameter is not specified, the default
+% is \cs{ytCurrRMAName}, which is defined by the \cs{ytRmAnnot} macro.
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] The video Id for the YouTube video to play
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] The text that displays the link.
+%\end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytvIdPresets}[1]{\def\yt@vIdPresets{#1}}
+\ytvIdPresets{\linktxtcolor{webbrown}}
+\newcommand{\ytvId}{\@ifstar{\def\yt@lnk@play{false}\yt@@vId}
+ {\def\yt@lnk@play{true}\yt@@vId}}
+\newcommand{\yt@@vId}[3][\ytCurrRMAName]{%
+ \oyt@RMA#1\@nil\setLink[\presets{\yt@vIdPresets}
+ \A{\JS{aebStartPlayer(\yt@rm,"#2",\yt@lnk@play);}}]{#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \subsubsection{Using a Combobox}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytComboList}
+% The \cs{ytComboList} is a combox box of video Ids and titles. The user selects a
+% video based on its title, then presses the PLAY button. The two commands
+% \cs{ytComboListPresets} and \cs{ytComboBtnPresets} are used to set the appearances
+% of the combo box and the PLAY button.
+%\begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{[\#1]}:] eforms key-value pairs
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] The width of the combo box
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] The height of the combo box
+%\end{itemize}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytComboBtn}
+% A button to play the selection made in the combo box.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytPlayList}
+% This command is executed before \cs{ytComboBtn} to set the play list,
+% and the default value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytComboListPresets}[1]{\def\yt@ComboListPresets{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ytComboBtnPresets}[1]{\def\yt@ComboBtnPresets{#1}}
+\let\yt@ComboListPresets\@empty
+\let\yt@ComboBtnPresets\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use the \cs{ytPlayList} to pass the play list to the next combo box
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytPlayList}{\begingroup\@makeother\_\@makeother\'
+ \ytPlayList@i}
+\def\ytPlayList@i#1#2{\gdef\yt@pl@def{#1}\xdef\yt@pl@pl{#2}\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\declarePlayList}
+% A video ID may contain characters {\LaTeX} considers special, so we sanitize these
+% special characters before reading in the video ID. Near as I can determine, a video
+% id consists of 11 characters comprising combinations of letters (A-Z,a-z) numbers
+% (0-9) and special characters underscore and hyphen (\_ and -). We sanitize the last two.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\declarePlayList{<\cmd>}{
+% \ytIdTitle{<text>}{<VidID>}
+% ...
+% \ytIdTitle{<text>}{<VidID>}
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%The entries may also be in raw form `|[(<VidID>)(<text>)]|'. Note that the two arguments are
+%enclosed in parentheses, there is a problem with parsing if \texttt{<text>} itself contains
+%parentheses. Within \texttt{<text>} enclose matching parentheses in braces, for example,
+%\begin{flushleft}|\ytIdTitle{Kung-Fu Fighting {(Bruce Lee version)}}{GZ9e3Dy7obA}|\end{flushleft}
+% \changes{v1.1}{2016/10/04}{Added \string\cs{declarePlayList}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\declarePlayList}{\bgroup
+ \@makeother\_\@makeother\-
+ \yt@declarePlayList}
+\def\yt@declarePlayList#1#2{%
+ \gdef#1{#2}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytIdTitle}
+% A convenience command to lay out the playlist, for example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\declarePlayList{\playListii}{%
+% \ytIdTitle{Elfego Baca}{gRwa0MdeqVs}
+% \ytIdTitle{Texas John Slaughter}{7yrk1BvtLE8}
+% \ytIdTitle{Swamp Fox}{-SBPnw5riLM&NR}
+% \ytIdTitle{Zorro Promo}{cKludhxEoJ0}
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytIdTitle}[2]{[(#2)(#1)]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytNewBaseName}
+% \cs{ytNewBaseName} is a not so perfect attempt to fix the problem of having
+% multiple combo boxes on one page. The field names need to be distinct. We
+% can pass the new field name using this command.
+% \begin{macro}{\ytResetBaseName}
+% This command resets the field name back to its default value.
+% Both of these commands apply to \cs{ytComboList} and to \cs{ytComboBtn}.
+% \changes{v1.0}{2011/08/23}{Added \cs{ytBaseName} to pass a field title to
+% combo box and controlling play button}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\ytListCnt \ytListCnt=0
+\newcommand{\ytNewBaseName}[1][]{%
+ \def\yt@argi{#1}\ifx\yt@argi\@empty\global\advance\ytListCnt1\relax
+ \gdef\yt@BaseName{\yt@CurrRMAName\the\ytListCnt}\else
+ \gdef\yt@BaseName{\yt@CurrRMAName#1}\fi
+}
+\newcommand{\ytResetBaseName}{\gdef\yt@BaseName{\yt@CurrRMAName}}
+\ytResetBaseName
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% Now we have the code for \cs{ytComboList}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytComboList}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \comboBox[\DV{\yt@pl@def}\V{\yt@pl@def}
+ \presets{\yt@ComboListPresets}#1]{ytSelect\yt@BaseName}
+ {#2}{#3}{\yt@pl@pl}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The parameters for \cs{ytComboBtn} are
+%\begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{[\#1]}:] The the name of the \cs{ytRmAnnot} this selection is to play in
+% the default is \cs{ytCurrRMAName}.
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] The width of the combo box
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] The height of the combo box
+% the array of values and titles.
+%\end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytComboBtn}[3][]{%
+ \expandafter\oyt@RMA\ytCurrRMAName\@nil%
+ \pushButton[\CA{\ytStrPLAY}\presets{\yt@ComboBtnPresets}#1
+ \A{\JS{var f=this.getField("ytSelect\yt@BaseName");\r
+ aebStartPlayer(\yt@rm,f.value,!event.shift);
+ }}]{ytSelectBtn\yt@BaseName}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \subsection{Support for the \textsf{popupmenu} package}
+% \begin{macro}{\ytPopupMenuData}
+% A command use to list the popupmenu data. It defines a command
+% \cs{ytPopupData} that is used in the JS support for popup menus.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytPopupMenuData}[1]{{\toks0={// yt4pdf: Begin popup menu data^^J}%
+ \@tfor\yt@menu:=#1\do{%
+ \toks2=\expandafter{\yt@menu}%
+ \edef\@tmp@exp{\the\toks0\the\toks2^^J}%
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\@tmp@exp}%
+ }\xdef\ytPopupData{\the\toks0// End of popup menu data}%
+}}
+\def\ytPopupData{// No popup menu data defined}%
+% \begin{macro}{\puIdTitle}
+% A convenience macro for entering popupmenu data for youtube videos.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\puIdTitle{\string\"Sea Hunt\string\" TV serie}{MW-IZ67iADU}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that we must protect the double quote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\puIdTitle}[2]{\item{title={#1},return={[\itemindex,'#2']}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Strings that can be localized}
+% The following strings are used on the buttons, and in the document level JS
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ytStrPLAY}{PLAY}
+\newcommand{\ytStrREPLAY}{REPLAY}
+\newcommand{\ytStrPAUSE}{PAUSE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrBuffering}{Buffering...}
+\newcommand{\ytStrStopLoading}{Stop Loading}
+\newcommand{\ytStrMUTE}{MUTE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrUNMUTE}{UNMUTE}
+\newcommand{\ytStrREWIND}{REWIND}
+\newcommand{\ytStrLoadVideo}{Load Video}
+\newcommand{\ytStrWatchOnWeb}{Watch on YouTube}
+% response dialog box associated with ytSelect()
+\newcommand{\ytRespQues}{Enter the YouTube Video ID}
+\newcommand{\ytRespTitle}{Load a Video}
+\newcommand{\ytRespLabel}{ID:}
+% alert error messages
+\newcommand{\ytStrErrorVideoNotFound}{Error: Video not found}
+\newcommand{\ytStrErrorNoEmbed}{Error: This video does not allow
+ embedded playback \r\r Would you like to view this video
+ on the web?}
+\newcommand{\ytStrConnecTimedOut}{Connection timed out, try again.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Document level JavaScript}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{insDLJS*}[ytPlayToggle]{yt}
+\begin{newsegment}{yt4PDF: YouTube for PDF JavaScript}
+/*
+ Document-level script for YouTube player
+ Document-level script for the PDFtube embedded YouTube player
+ ***************************************************************
+ Functions to be called by buttons or links on the PDF
+ in each case, "rm" is the RichMedia annot containing the player
+ All these are optional and can be renamed or edited as required
+ ***********************************************************
+*/
+// toggle play/pause (button labels updated by event functions)
+function ytPlayToggle(rm) {
+ var ps = rm.callAS("getPlayerState");
+ rm.callAS((ps == 1)? "pauseVideo" : "playVideo");
+}
+// toggle mute (have to update button labels ourselves)
+function ytMuteToggle(rm) {
+ var im = rm.callAS("isMuted");
+ if (im) {
+ event.target.buttonSetCaption("\ytStrMUTE");
+ rm.callAS("unMute");
+ } else {
+ event.target.buttonSetCaption("\ytStrUNMUTE");
+ rm.callAS("mute");
+ }
+}
+// Ask the user for the ID number of a new video, and play it
+function ytSelect(rm,vID) {
+ var rsp = app.response({
+ cQuestion: "\ytRespQues",
+ cTitle: "\ytRespTitle",
+ cDefault: vID,
+ cLabel: "\ytRespLabel"});
+ if (rsp !=null && rsp != "")
+ aebStartPlayer(rm,rsp,true); // dps
+}
+// open the video's YouTube page in the web browser
+function ytOpenWeb(rm) {
+ var link = rm.callAS("getVideoUrl");
+ if (link != null) {
+ app.launchURL(link,true);
+ rm.activated = false;
+ }
+}
+// rewind (seek to zero)
+function ytRewind(rm) { rm.callAS("seekTo",0); }
+/*
+ ************************************************************
+ Functions called by the player itself, in response to events
+ as the events are "external", the annot is not the target.
+ These functions must exist and match the names in the SWF.
+ ***********************************************************
+*/
+function ytPlayerReady() {
+
+ // this is the place to load your default video - for example...
+ console.println("<YT> Player loaded and ready");
+ // this.getAnnotsRichMedia(this.pageNum)[0].callAS("loadVideoById",
+ // "eNzrn8-JFSE",0);
+ aebStartPlayer.isPlayerReady=true; // dps
+}
+function ytStateChange(st) {
+ // Possible values are unstarted (-1), ended (0), playing (1),
+ // paused (2), buffering (3), video cued (5)
+ var lbl = "";
+ console.println("<YT> State changed to " + st);
+ if (st == 0) lbl = "\ytStrREPLAY";
+ else if (st == 1) lbl = "\ytStrPAUSE";
+ else if (st == 3) lbl = "\ytStrBuffering";
+ else if (st == 2 || st == 5) lbl = "\ytStrPLAY";
+ if (lbl) this.getField("playToggle").buttonSetCaption(lbl);
+}
+function ytPlaybackQualityChange(str) {
+ // Possible values are "small", "medium", "large" and "hd720"
+ console.println("<YT> Quality changed to " + str);
+}
+function ytProgress(q) {
+ // q has four properties that you can use to update form fields,
+ // such as...
+ //this.getField("currentTime").value = q.CurrentTime;
+ //this.getField("Duration").value = q.Duration;
+ //this.getField("BytesLoaded").value = q.BytesLoaded;
+ //this.getField("BytesTotal").value = q.BytesTotal;
+}
+function ytError(err) {
+ // Video cannot be played
+ console.println("<YT> ERROR code " + err + " received");
+ if (err == 100)
+ app.alert("\ytStrErrorVideoNotFound", 0, 0, "YouTube");
+ else {
+ var resp=app.alert("\ytStrErrorNoEmbed", 1, 3, "YouTube");
+ if (resp==4) {
+ aebCancelWait(false);
+ ytOpenWeb(aebStartPlayer.annot);
+ }
+ }
+}
+/*
+ We start the player if the annot is activated, if not,
+ we set annot.activated=true, and wait for the widget to say it
+ is ready. When ready, ytPlayerReady() sets
+ aebStartPlayer.isPlayerReady=true
+*/
+function aebStartPlayer(rm,Id,bPlay) {
+ aebStartPlayer.annot=rm;
+ if (aebStartPlayer.annot.activated)
+ aebStartPlayer.annot.callAS(%
+(bPlay)?"loadVideoById":"cueVideoById",Id,0);
+ else {
+ aebCancelWait(false);
+ aebStartPlayer.annot.activated=true;
+ aebStartPlayer.isPlayerReady=false;
+ aebStartPlayer.twait=app.setInterval(%
+'aebWait4Ready(\"'+Id+'\",'+bPlay+');',250);
+ aebStartPlayer.to=app.setTimeOut("aebCancelWait(true)", 10000);
+ }
+}
+aebStartPlayer.isPlayerReady=false;
+aebStartPlayer.twait=null;
+aebStartPlayer.to=null;
+/*
+ If the player is ready, we start the video, and clear
+ the setInterval, otherwise, we wait.
+*/
+function aebWait4Ready(Id,bPlay) {
+ if (aebStartPlayer.isPlayerReady) {
+ aebCancelWait(false);
+ aebStartPlayer.annot.callAS(%
+(bPlay)?"loadVideoById":"cueVideoById",Id,0);
+ }
+}
+function aebCancelWait(bNotify) {
+ var twait=aebStartPlayer.twait;
+ if (aebStartPlayer.to!=null)
+ try { app.clearTimeOut(aebStartPlayer.to); } catch(e) {};
+ aebStartPlayer.to=null;
+ if (aebStartPlayer.twait!=null)
+ try { app.clearInterval(aebStartPlayer.twait); } catch(e) {}
+ aebStartPlayer.twait=null;
+ if ( bNotify && twait!=null ) app.alert("\ytStrConnecTimedOut");
+}
+\end{newsegment}
+\begin{newsegment}{Popup Menu Data and JS}
+\ytPopupData
+var aChoice;
+function ytProcessMenu(aMenu) {
+ var cChoice = \popUpMenu(aMenu);
+ if ( cChoice != null ) {
+ aChoice=eval(cChoice);
+ if (aChoice[1]=="") return null;
+ var thisChoice=aChoice[0];
+ if (ytProcessMenu.nChoice==undefined) {
+ ytProcessMenu.nChoice=thisChoice;
+ eval("aMenu"+ytProcessMenu.nChoice).bMarked=true;
+ } else {
+ eval("aMenu"+ytProcessMenu.nChoice).bMarked=false;
+ var oldnChoice=ytProcessMenu.nChoice;
+ ytProcessMenu.nChoice=thisChoice;
+ eval("aMenu"+ytProcessMenu.nChoice).bMarked=(oldnChoice==ytProcessMenu.nChoice)?false:true;
+ }
+ return aChoice;
+ } else return null;
+}
+function ytPopupMenu(rmaName,ytmenu) {
+ var aChoice=ytProcessMenu(ytmenu);
+ var rm=this.getAnnotRichMedia(this.pageNum,rmaName);
+ if (aChoice!=null) {
+ if (ytProcessMenu.lastDescrip==undefined) {
+ aebStartPlayer(rm,aChoice[1],!event.shift);
+ } else {
+ if (ytProcessMenu.lastDescrip!=aChoice[1]) {
+ aebStartPlayer(rm,aChoice[1],!event.shift);
+ }
+ }
+ ytProcessMenu.lastDescrip=aChoice[1];
+ }
+}
+\end{newsegment}
+\end{insDLJS*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+\endinput
+
+rm=this.getAnnotRichMedia(this.pageNum,"YouTube1");
+rm.callAS("cueVideoById", "GZ9e3Dy7obA");
diff --git a/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.ins b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6732fb25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texmf-dist/source/latex/yt4pdf/yt4pdf.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1999-2006 D. P. Story
+%%
+%% This file is part of the `AcroTeX eDucation Bundle'.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public
+%% License, either version 1.2 of this license or (at your option) any
+%% later version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\def\filedate{2010/09/10}
+\def\batchfile{yt4pdf.ins}
+
+\input docstrip
+\ifx\generate\undefined
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+ \Msg{* version 2.4 or later.}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+ \Msg{*}
+ \Msg{**********************************************}
+ \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex and get a newer one.}
+ \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+ \batchmode
+ \csname @@end\endcsname\end
+\fi
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+
+\generate
+{%
+ \file{yt4pdf.sty}{\from{yt4pdf.dtx}{copyright,package}}
+}
+
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space To finish the installation you have to copy the files }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space *.sty, *.cfg and *.def into a directory searched by TeX}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***************************************************************}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput